Modern History

Billions For The Bankers

The Federal Reserve System

Billions.exe  is the complete document in "Ms Word" format of  "Billions for the Bankers, Debts for the People" by American Pastor Sheldon Emry. It can be downloaded by clicking on Billions.exe  or viewed at:  http://www.justiceplus.org/bankers.htm.

This document on banking is very similar to the one written by J. A. Thauberger of Regina in the mid 90s.  J.A. Thauberger's version examines corruption at the core of the Canadian monetary system.

See: Billions for the Banker, Debts for the People
Americans and Canadians have lost control of their money. How can we get it back?

The French translation would greatly help this site!
Nous sommes à la recherche de traducteurs(euses) bénévoles!
equite@justiceplus.org




Billions for Bankers--Debts for the People

by Pastor Sheldon Emry

This material is not copyrighted. Feel free to copy and distribute.

Introduction

In 1901 the national debt of the United States was less than $1 billion. It stayed at less than $1 billion until we got into World War I. Then it jumped to $25 billion.

The national debt nearly doubled between World War I and World War II, increasing from $25 to $49 billion.

Between 1942 and 1952, the debt zoomed from $72 billion to $265 billion. In 1962 it was $303 billion. By 1970, the debt had increased to $383 billion.

Between 1971 and 1976 it rose from $409 billion to $631 billion. The debt experienced its greatest growth, however, during the 1980s, fueled by an unprecedented peacetime military buildup. In 1998, the outstanding public debt will roar past $5.5 trillion.

The unconstitutional "share" of this debt for every man, woman and child is currently $20,594.86 and will continue to increase an average of $630 million every day, which dosn't include the $26 trillion in individual credit card debts, mortgages, automobile leases and so on.

U.S. NATIONAL DEBT
The Outstanding Public Debt as of 08/25/98 at 10:28:37 AM PDT is:
$5,516,699,306,752.93

The estimated population of the United States is 270,374,697
so each citizen's share of this debt is $20,403.90.

Today, as we stand before the dawn of a New World Order run by internationalist financiers, most of the revenue collected by the Federal government in the form of individual income taxes will go straight to paying the interest on the debt alone. At the rate the debt is increasing, eventually we'll reach a point where, even if the government takes every penny of its citizens' income via taxation, it will still not collect enough to keep up with the interest payments.

The government will own nothing, the people will own nothing, and the banks will own everything. The New World Order will foreclose on America.

If the present trend continues, and there is no evidence whatsoever that it will not continue, we can expect the national debt to nearly double again within the next six to eight years. By then, the interest on the debt alone should be in the $400 billion a year range.

Prologue: Three Types of Conquest

History reveals nations can be conquered by the use of one or more of three methods.

The most common is conquest by war. In time, though, this method usually fails, because the captives hate the captors and rise up and drive them out if they can. Much force is needed to maintain control, making it expensive for the conquering nation.

A second method is by religion, where men are convinced they must give their captors part of their earnings as "obedience to God." Such a captivity is vulnerable to philosophical exposure or by overthrow by armed force, since religion by its nature lacks military force to regain control, once its captives become disillusioned.

The third method can be called economic conquest. It takes place when nations are placed under "tribute" without the use of visible force or coercion, so that the victims do not realize they have been conquered. "Tribute" is collected from them in the form of "legal" debts and taxes, and they believe they are paying it for their own good, for the good of others, or to protect all from some enemy. Their captors become their "benefactors" and "protectors".

Although this is the slowest to impose. It is often quite long lasting, as the captives do not see any military force arrayed against them, their religion is left more or less intact, they have freedom to speak and travel, and they participate in "elections" for their rulers. Without realizing it, they are conquered, and the instruments of their own society are used to transfer their wealth to their captors and make the conquest complete.

In 1900 the average American worker paid few taxes and had little debt. Last year, payments on debts and taxes took more than half of what he earned. Is it possible a form of conquest has been imposed on America? Read the following pages and decide for yourself. And may God have mercy on this once debt-free and great nation.

The Real Story of Money Control in America



Americans, living in what is called the richest nation on earth, seem always to be short of money. It's impossible for many families to make ends meet unless both parents are in the work force.

Men and women hope for overtime hours or take part time jobs evenings and weekends; children look for odd jobs for spending money; the family debt climbs higher.

Psychologists say one of the biggest causes of family quarrels and breakups is "arguing over money." Much of this trouble can be traced to our present "debt-money" system.

Too few Americans realize why the Founders wrote into Article I of the U. S. Constitution:

"Congress shall have the power to coin money and regulate the value thereof."

Thomas Jefferson

They did this, as we will show, in the hope that it would prevent "love of money" from destroying the Republic they had founded. We shall see how subversion of Article I has brought on us the "evil" of which God warns us in 1 Timothy 6:10.

Money is "Created", Not Grown or Built.

Economists use the term "create" when speaking of the process by which money comes into existence. "Creation" means making something which did not exist before. Lumber workers make boards from trees, workers build houses from lumber, and factories manufacture automobiles from metal, glass and other materials. But in all these they did not actually "create."

They only changed existing materials into a more usable and, therefore, more valuable form. This is not so with money. Here, and here alone, man actually "creates" something out of nothing. A piece of paper of little value is printed so that it is worth a piece of lumber. With different figures it can buy the automobile or even the house. It's value has been "created" in the truest sense of the word.

"Creating" money is very profitable!

As is seen by the above, money is very cheap to make, and whoever does the "creating" of money in a nation can make a tremendous profit. Builders work hard to make a profit of 5 percent above their cost to build a house.

Auto makers sell their cars for 1 percent to 2 percent above the cost of manufacture and it is considered good business. But money "manufactures" have no limit on their profits, since a few cents will print a $1 bill or a $10,000 bill.

That profit is part of our story, but first let consider another unique characteristic of the thing -- money, the love of which is the "root of all evil".

Adequate money supply needed

An adequate supply of money is indispensable to civilized society. We could forego many other things, but without money industry would grind to a halt, farms would become only self-sustaining units, surplus food would disappear, jobs requiring the work of more than one man or one family would remain undone, shipping and large movement of goods would cease, hungry people would plunder and kill to remain alive, and all government except family or tribe would cease to function.

An overstatement, you say? Not at all. Money is the blood of civilized society, the means of all commercial trade except simple barter. It is the measure and the instrument by which one product is sold and another purchased. Remove money or even reduce the supply below that which is necessary to carry on current levels of trade, and the results are catastrophic.

For an example, we need only look at America's depression of the early 1930's.

Bankers' Depression of the 1930's.

In 1930 America did not lack industrial capacity, fertile farmlands, skilled and willing workers or industrious families. It had an extensive and efficient transportation system in railroads, road networks, and inland and ocean waterways. Communications between regions and localities were the best in the world, utilizing telephone, teletype, radio, and a well operated government mail system.

No war had ravaged the cities or the countryside, no pestilence weakened the population, nor had famine stalked the land. The United States of America in 1930 lacked only one thing: an adequate supply of money to carry on trade and commerce.

In the early 1930s, bankers, the only source of new money and credit, deliberately refused loans to industries, stores and farms. Payments on existing loans were required however, and money rapidly disappeared from circulation. Goods were available to be purchased, jobs waiting to be done, but the lack of money brought the nation to a standstill.

By this simple ploy America was put in a "depression" and bankers took possession of hundreds of thousands of farms, homes, and business properties. The people were told, "times are hard" and "money is short." Not understanding the system, they were cruelly robbed of their earnings, their savings, and their property.

No Money for Peace, but Plenty for War.

World War II ended the "depression." The same Bankers who in the early 1930's had no loans for peacetime houses, food and clothing, suddenly had unlimited billions to lend for army barracks, K-rations and uniforms.

A nation that in 1934 could not produce food for sale, suddenly could produce bombs to send free to Germany and Japan! (More on this riddle later).

With the sudden increase in money, people were hired, farms sold their produce, factories went to two shifts, mines reopened, and "The Great Depression" was over!

Some politicians were blamed for it and others took credit for ending it. The truth is the lack of money (caused by Bankers) brought on the depression, and adequate money ended it. The people were never told that simple truth and in this article we will endeavor to show how these same bankers who control our money and credit have used their control to plunder America and place us in bondage.

Power to Coin and Regulate Money

When we can see the disastrous results of an artificially created shortage of money, we can better understand why our Founding Fathers, who understood both money and God's Laws, insisted on placing the power to "create" money and the power to control it ONLY in the hands of the Federal Congress.

They believed that ALL Citizens should share in the profits of its "creation" and therefore the Federal government must be the only creator of money. They further believed that all citizens, of whatever state, territory or station in life, would benefit by an adequate and stable currency. Therefore, the Federal government must also be, by law, the only controller of the value of money.

Since the Federal Congress was the only legislative body subject to all the citizens at the ballot box, it was, to their minds, the only safe depository of so much profit and so much power. They wrote it out in simple, but all inclusive manner: "Congress shall have the power to Coin Money and Regulate the Value Thereof."

How We Lost Control of the Federal Reserve

Instead of the Constitutional method of creating our money and putting it into circulation, we now have and entirely unconstitutional system. This has brought our country to the brink of disaster, as we shall see.

Since our money was handled both legally and illegally before 1913, we shall consider only the years following 1913, since from that year on, all of our money had been created and issued by an illegal method that will eventually destroy the United States if it is not changed. Prior to 1913, America was a prosperous, powerful, and growing nation, at peace with its neighbors and the envy of the world. But in December of 1913, Congress, with many members away for the Christmas Holidays, passed what has since been known as the Federal Reserve Act. (For the full story of how this infamous legislation was forced through our Congress, read "Conquest or Consent", by W. D. Vennard).

Omitting the burdensome details, it simply authorized the establishment of a Federal Reserve Corporation, run by a Board of Directors (The Federal Reserve Board). The act divided the United States into 12 Federal Reserve "Districts."

This simple, but terrible, law completely removed from Congress the right to "create" money or to have any control over its "creation", and gave that function to The Federal Reserve Corporation. It was accompanied by the appropriate fanfare. The propaganda claimed that this would "remove money from politics" (they did not say "and therefore from the people's control")and prevent "boom and bust" economic activity from hurting our citizens.

The people were not told then, and most still do not know today, that the Federal Reserve Corporation is a private corporation controlled by bankers and therefore is operated for the financial gain of the bankers over the people rather than for the good of the people. The word "Federal" was used only to deceive the people.

More Disastrous than Pearl Harbor

Since that "day of infamy", more disastrous to us than Pearl Harbor, the small group of "privileged" people who lend us "our" money have accrued to themselves all of the profits of printing our money -- and more! Since 1913 they have "created" tens of billions of dollars in money and credit, which, as their own personal property, they can lend to our government and our people at interest (usury).

"The rich get richer and the poor get poorer" had become the secret policy of the Federal government. An example of the process of "creation" and its conversion to peoples "debt" will aid our understanding.

Billions in Interest Owed to Private Banks

We shall start with the need for money. The Federal Government, having spent more than it has taken from its citizens in taxes, needs, for the sake of illustration, $1,000,000,000. Since it does not have the money, and Congress has given away its authority to "create" it, the Government must go to the "creators" for the $1 billion.

But, the Federal Reserve, a private corporation, does not just give its money away! The Bankers are willing to deliver $1,000,000,000 in money or credit to the Federal Government in exchange for the government's agreement to pay it back -- with interest. So Congress authorizes the Treasury Department to print $1,000,000,000 in U.S. Bonds, which are then delivered to the Federal Reserve Bankers.

The Federal Reserve then pays the cost of printing the $1 billion (about $1,000) and makes the exchange. The government then uses the money to pay its obligations. What are the results of this fantastic transaction? Well, $1 billion in government bills are paid all right, but the Government has now indebted the people to the bankers for $1 billion on which the people must pay interest!

Tens of thousands of such transactions have taken place since 1913 so that in 1996, the U.S. Government is indebted to the Bankers for more than $5,000,000,000,000 (trillion). Most of the income taxes that we pay as individuals now goes straight into the hands of the bankers, just to pay off the interest alone, with no hope of ever paying off the principle. Our children will be forced into servitude.

But wait! There's more!

You say, "This is terrible!" Yes, it is, but we have shown only part of the sordid story. Under this unholy system, those United States Bonds have now become "assets" of the banks in the Reserve System which they then use as "reserves" to "create" more "credit" to lend. Current "reserve" requirements allow them to use that $1 billion in bonds to "create" as much as $15 billion in new "credit" to lend to states, municipalities, to individuals and businesses.

Added to the original $1 billion, they could have $16 billion of "created credit" out in loans paying them interest with their only cost being $1,000 for printing the original $1 billion! Since the U.S. Congress has not issued Constitutional money since 1863 (more than 100 years), in order for the people to have money to carry on trade and commerce they are forced to borrow the "created credit" of the Monopoly bankers and pay them usury-interest!

Manipulating Stocks for Fun and Profit

In addition to almost unlimited usury, the bankers have another method of drawing vast amounts of wealth. The banks who control the money at the top are able to approve or disapprove large loans to large and successful corporations to the extent that refusal of a loan will bring about a reduction in the selling price of the corporation's stock.

After depressing the price, the bankers' agents buy large blocks of the company's stock. Then, if the bank suddenly approves a multi-million dollar loan to the company, the stock rises and is then sold for a profit. In this manner, billions of dollars are made with which to buy more stock. This practice is so refined today that the Federal Reserve Board need only announce to the newspapers an increase or decrease in their "discount rate" to send stocks soaring or crashing at their whim.

Using this method since 1913, the bankers and their agents have purchased secret or open control of almost every large corporation in America. Using this leverage, they then force the corporations to borrow huge sums from their banks so that corporate earnings are siphoned off in the form of interest to the banks. This leaves little as actual "profits" which can be paid as dividends and explains why banks can reap billions in interest from corporate loans even when stock prices are depressed. In effect, the bankers get a huge chunk of the profits, while individual stockholders are left holding the bag.

The millions of working families of America are now indebted to the few thousand banking families for twice the assessed value of the entire United States. And these Banking families obtained that debt against us for the cost of paper, ink, and bookkeeping!

The interest amount is never created

The only way new money (which is not true money, but rather credit representing a debt), goes into circulation in America is when it is borrowed from the bankers. When the State and people borrow large sums, we seem to prosper. However, the bankers "create" only the amount of the principal of each loan, never the extra amount needed to pay the interest. Therefore, the new money never equals the new debt added. The amounts needed to pay the interest on loans is not "created," and therefore does not exist!

Under this system, where new debt always exceeds new money no matter how much or how little is borrowed, the total debt increasingly outstrips the amount of money available to pay the debt. The people can never, ever get out of debt!

The following example will show the viciousness of this interest-debt system via its "built in" shortage of money.

The Tyranny of Compound Interest

When a citizen goes to a banker to borrow $100,000 to purchase a home or a farm, the bank clerk has the borrower agree to pay back the loan plus interest. At 8.25% interest for 30 years, the borrower must agree to pay $751.27 per month for a total of $270,456.00.

The clerk then requires the citizen to assign to the banker the right of ownership of the property if the borrower does not make the required payments. The bank clerk then gives the borrower a $100,000 check or a $100,000 deposit slip, crediting the borrower's checking account with $100,000.

The borrower then writes checks to the builder, subcontractors, etc. who in turn write checks. $100,000 of new "checkbook" money is thereby added to the "money in circulation."

However, this is the fatal flaw in the system: the only new money created and put into circulation is the amount of the loan, $100,000. The money to pay the interest is NOT created, and therefore was NOT added to "money in circulation."

Even so, this borrower (and those who follow him in ownership of the property) must earn and take out of circulation $270,456.00,  $170,456.00 more than he put in circulation when he borrowed the original $100,000! (This interest cheats all families out of nicer homes. It is not that they cannot afford them; it is because the bankers' interest forces them to pay for nearly 3 homes to get one!)

Every new loan puts the same process in operation. Each borrower adds a small sum to the total money supply when he borrows, but the payments on the loan (because of interest) then deduct a much larger sum from the total money supply.

There is therefore no way all debtors can pay off the money lenders. As they pay the principle and interest, the money in circulation disappears. All they can do is struggle against each other, borrowing more and more from the money lenders each generation. The money lenders (bankers), who produce nothing of value, gradually gain a death grip on the land, buildings, and present and future earnings of the whole working population. Proverbs 22:7 has come to pass in America. "The rich ruleth over the poor, and the borrower is servant to the lender."

Small loans do the same thing

If you have not quite grasped the impact of the above, let us consider an auto loan for 5 years at 9.5% interest. Step 1: Citizen borrows $25,000 and pays it into circulation (it goes to the dealer, factory, miner, etc.) and signs a note agreeing to pay the Bankers a total of $31,503 over 5 years. Step 2: Citizen pays $525.05 per month of his earnings to the Banker. In five years, he will remove from circulation $6,503 more than he put in circulation.

Every loan of banker "created" money (credit) causes the same thing to happen. Since this has happened millions of times since 1913 (and continues today), you can see why America has gone from a prosperous, debt-free nation to a debt-ridden nation where practically every home, farm and business is paying usury-tribute to the bankers.

Checking Up On Cash

In the millions of transactions made each year like those just discussed, little actual currency changes hands, nor is it necessary that it do so.

About 95 percent of all "cash" transactions in the U. S. are executed by check. Consider also that banks must only hold 10 percent of their deposits on site in cash at any given time. This means 90 percent of all deposits, though they may actually be held by the ban, are not present in the form of actual cash currency.

That leaves the banker relatively safe to "create" that so-called "loan" by writing the check or deposit slip not against actual money, but against your promise to pay it back! The cost to him is paper, ink and a few dollars of overhead for each transaction. It is "check kiting" on an enormous scale. The profits increase rapidly, year after year.

Our Own Debt is Spiraling into Infinity

In 1910 the U. S. Federal debt was only $1 billion, or $12.40 per citizen. State and local debts were practically non-existent.

By 1920, after only six years of Federal Reserve shenanigans, the Federal debt had jumped to $24 billion, or $228 per person.

In 1960 the Federal debt reached $284 billion, or $1,575 per citizen and state and local debts were mushrooming.

In 1998 the Federal debt passed $5.5 trillion, or $20,403.90 per man, woman and child and is growing exponentially.

State and local debts are increasing as fast Federal debts. However, they are too cunning to take the title to everything at once. They instead leave us with some "illusion of ownership" so you and your children will continue to work and pay the bankers more of your earnings on ever increasing debts. The "establishment" has captured our people with their debt-money system as certainly as if they had marched in with an uniformed army.

Gambling Away the American Dream

To grasp the truth that periodic withdrawal of money through interest payments will inexorably transfer all wealth in the nation to the receiver of interest, imagine yourself in a poker or dice game where everyone must buy the chips (the medium of exchange) from a "banker" who does not risk chips in the game.

He just watches the table and reaches in every hour to take 10 percent to 15 percent of all the chips on the table. As the game goes on, the amount of chips in the possession of each player will fluctuate according to his luck.

However, the total number of chips available to play the game (carry on trade and business) will decrease steadily.

As the game starts getting low on chips, some players will run out. If they want to continue to play, they must buy or borrow more chips from the "banker". The "banker" will sell (lend) them only if the player signs a "mortgage" agreeing to give the "Banker" some real property (car, home, farm, business, etc.) if he cannot make periodic payments to pay back all the chips plus some extra chips (interest). The payments must be made on time, whether he wins (makes a profit) or not.

It is easy to see that no matter how skillfully they play, eventually the "banker" will end up with all of his original chips back, and except for the very best players, the rest, if they stay in long enough, will lose to the "banker" their homes, their farms, their businesses, perhaps even their cars, watches, and the shirts off their backs!

Our real life situation is much worse than any poker game. In a poker game no one is forced into debt, and anyone can quit at any time and keep whatever he still has. But in real life, even if we borrow little ourselves from the "bankers," our local, State and Federal governments borrow billions in our name, squander it, then confiscate our earnings via taxation in order to pay off the bankers with interest.

We are forced to play the game, and none can leave except by death. We pay as long as we live, and our children pay after we die. If we cannot or refuse to pay, the government sends the police to take our property and give it to the bankers. The bankers risk nothing in the game; they just collect their percentage and "win it all." In Las Vegas, all games are rigged to pay the owner a percentage, and they rake in millions. The Federal Reserve bankers' "game" is also rigged, and it pays off in billions!

In recent years, Bankers have added some new cards to their deck: credit cards are promoted as a convenience and a great boon to trade. Actually, they are ingenious devices from the seller and 18% interest from buyers. A real "stacked" deck!

Yes, it's political too

Democrat, Republican, and independent voters who have wondered why politicians always spend more tax money than they take in should now see the reason. When they begin to study our money system, they soon realize that these politicians are not the agents of the people but are the agents of the bankers, for whom they plan ways to place the people further in debt.

It takes only a little imagination to see that if Congress had been "creating," spending and issuing into circulation the necessary increase in the money supply, there would be no national debt. Trillions of dollars of other debts would be practically non-existent.

Since there would be no original cost of money except printing, and no continuing costs such as interest, Federal taxes would be almost nil. Money, once in circulation, would remain there and go on serving its purpose as a medium of exchange for generation after generation and century after century, with no payments to the Bankers whatsoever!

Continuing Cycles of Debt and War

But instead of peace and debt-free prosperity, we have ever-mounting debt and cyclical periods of war. We as a people are now ruled by a system of banking influence that has usurped the mantle of government, disguised itself as our legitimate government, and set about to pauperize and control our people.

It is now a centralized, all-powerful political apparatus whose main purposes are promoting war, confiscating the people's money, and propagandizing to perpetuate its power. Our two main political parties have become its servants, the various departments of government have become its spending agencies, and the Internal Revenue Service is its collection agency.

Unknown to the people, it operates in close cooperation with similar apparatuses in other nations, which are also disguised as "governments."

Some, we are told, are friends. Some, we are told, are enemies. "Enemies" are built up through international manipulations and used to frighten the American people into going billions of dollars further into debt to the bankers for "military preparedness," "foreign aid to stop communism," "the drug war," etc.

Citizens, deliberately confused by brainwashing propaganda, watch helplessly while our politicians give food, goods, and money to banker-controlled alien governments under the guise of "better relations" and "easing tensions." Our banker-controlled government takes our finest and bravest sons and sends them into foreign wars where tens of thousands are murdered, and hundreds of thousands are crippled (not to mention collateral damage and casualties among the "enemy" troops.)

When the "war" is over, we have gained nothing, but we are billions of dollars further in debt to the bankers, which was the reason for the "war" in the first place!

And There's More

The profits from these massive debts have been used to erect a complete and, almost hidden, economic colossus, over our nation. They keep telling us they are trying to do us good, when in truth they work to bring harm and injury to our people. These would be despots know, it is easier to control and rob a ill, poorly educated, and confused people, than it is a healthy and intelligent population, so they deliberately prevent real cures for diseases, they degrade our educational systems, and they stir up social and racial unrest. For the same reason, they favor drug use, alcohol, sexual promiscuity, abortion, pornography, and crime. Everything, which debilitates the minds and bodies of the people, is secretly encouraged, as it makes the people less able to oppose them, or, even, to understand what is being done to them.

Family, morals, love of country, the Christian religion, all that is honorable, is being swept away, while they try to build their new, subservient man.  Our new "rulers" are trying to change our whole racial, social, religious, and political order, but they will not change the debt-money-economic system, by which they rob and rule.  Our people have become tenants and "debt-slaves", to the Bankers, and their agents, in the land our fathers conquered. It is conquest through the most, gigantic fraud and swindle, in the history of mankind. And we remind you again: The key to their wealth and power, over us, is their ability to create "money" out of nothing, and lend it to us, at interest. If they had not been allowed to do that, they would never have gained secret control of our nation.  How true Solomon's words are: "The rich ruleth over the poor, and the borrower is servant to the lender "(Proverbs 22:7).

God Almighty warned, in the Bible, that one of the curses, which would come upon His people, for disobeying His laws was: The stranger that is within thee shall get up above thee very high; and thou shall come down very low. He shall lend to thee, and thou shall not lend to him; he shall be the head, and thou shall be the tail. Deut. 28:44-45

Most of the owners of the large banks, in America, are of eastern-european ancestry, and connected with the Rothschild European banks. Has that warning come to fruition in America?

Let us, now, consider the correct method of providing the medium of exchange (money) needed by our people.

Every Citizen Can Be A Stock Holder in America

Under the Constitutional system, no private banks would exist to rob the people. Government banks under the control of the people's representatives would issue and control all money and credit. They would issue not only actual currency, but could lend limited credit at no interest for the purchase of capital goods, such as homes.

A $100,000 loan would require only $100,000 repayment, not $270,456.00 as it is now. Everyone who supplied materials and labor for the home would get paid just as they do today, but the bankers would not get $170,456.00 in interest.

That is why they ridicule and destroy anyone suggesting or proposing an alternative system.

History tells us of debt-free and interest-free money issued by governments.

The American colonies did it through colonial script in the 1700's. Their wealth soon rivaled that of England and brought restrictions from Parliament, which led to the Revolutionary War. Abraham Lincoln did it in 1863 to help finance the Civil War. He was later assassinated by a man many consider to have been an agent of the Rothchild Bank. No debt-free or interest-free money has been issued in America since then.

Several Arab nations issue interest free loans to their citizens today. (Now you can understand what all the commotion in the Middle East is all about, and why the banker-owned press is brainwashing American citizens to think of all Arabs as terrorists). The Saracen Empire forbade interest on money 1,000 years ago and its wealth outshone even Saxon Europe. Mandarin China issued its own money, interest-free and debt-free. Today, historians and art collectors consider those centuries to be China's time of greatest wealth, culture and peace.

Issuing money which does not have to be paid back in interest leaves the money available to use in the exchange of goods and services and its only continuing cost is replacement as the paper wears out. Money is the paper ticket by which transfers are made and should always be in sufficient quantity to transfer all possible production of the nation to the ultimate consumers. It is as ridiculous for a nation to say to its citizens, "You must consume less because we are short of money," as it would be for an airline to say, "Our planes are flying, but we cannot take you because we are short of tickets".

Citizen Control of U.S. Currency

Money, issued in such a way, would derive its value in exchange from the fact that it had come from the highest legal source in the nation and would be declared legal to pay all public and private debts.

Issued by a sovereign nation, not in danger of collapse, it would need no gold or silver or other so-called "precious" metals to back it.

As history shows, the stability and responsibility of government issuing it is the deciding factor in the acceptance of that government's currency--not gold, silver, or iron buried in some hole in the ground. Proof is America's currency today. Our gold and silver is practically gone, but our currency is accepted. But if the government was about to collapse our currency would be worthless.

Under the present system, the extra burden of interest forces workers and businesses to demand more money for the work and goods to pay their ever increasing debts and taxes. This increase in prices and wages is called "inflation." Bankers, politicians and "economists" blame it on everything but the real cause, which is the interest levied on money and debt by the Bankers.

This "inflation" benefits the money-lenders, since it wipes out savings of one generation so they can not finance or help the next generation, who must then borrow from the money-lenders and pay a large part of their life's labor to the usurer.

With an adequate supply of interest-free money, little borrowing would be required and prices would be established by people and goods, not by debts and usury.

Citizen control

If the Congress failed to act, or acted wrongly in the supply of money, the citizens would use the ballot or recall petitions to replace those who prevented correct action with others whom the people believe would pursue a better money policy. Since the creation of money and its issuance in sufficient quantity would be one of the few functions of Congress, the voter could decide on a candidate by his stand on money and other legitimate functions of the Federal government, instead of the diversionary issues which are presented to us today. All other problems, except the nation's defense, would be taken care of in the State, County, or City governments where they are best handled and most easily corrected.

An adequate national defense would be provided by the same citizen- controlled Congress, and there would be no bankers behind the scenes, bribing politicians to spend billions of dollars on overseas military adventures which ultimately serve the schemes of international finance.

Creating a Debt-Free America

With debt-free and interest-free money, there would be no direct confiscatory taxation and our homes would be mortgage-free without approximately $10,000-per-year payments to the bankers. Nor would they get $1000 to $3000 per year from every automobile on our roads.

We would need far fewer financial "help" in the form of "easy payment" plans, "revolving" charge accounts, loans to pay medical or hospital bills, loans to pay taxes, loans to pay for burials, loans to pay loans, nor any of the thousand and one usury bearing loans which now suck the life blood of American families.

Our officials, at all levels of government, would be working for the people instead of devising capers which will place us further in debt to the bankers. We would get out of entangling foreign alliances that have engulfed us in four major wars and scores of minor wars since the Federal Reserve Act was passed.

A debt-free America would leave parents with more time to spend raising their children. The elimination of the interest payments and debt would be the equivalent of a 50 percent raise in the purchasing power of every worker. This cancellation of interest-based private debts would result in the return to the people of $300 billion yearly in property and wealth that currently goes to banks.

Controlling Public Debate and Opinion

We realize that this small, and necessarily incomplete, article on money may be charged with oversimplification. Some may say that if it is that simple the people would have known about it, and it could not have happened.

But this conspiracy is as old as Babylon, and even in America it dates far back before the year 1913.

Actually, 1913 may be considered the year in which their previous plans came to fruition, opening the way for complete economic conquest of our people. The conspiracy is powerful enough in America to place its agents in positions as newspaper publishers, editors, columnists, church ministers, university presidents, professors, textbook writers, labor union leaders, filmmakers, radio and television commentators, politicians ranging from school board members to U. S. presidents, and many others.

These agents control the information available to our people. They manipulate public opinion, elect whomever they want locally and nationally, and never expose the crooked money system. They promote school bonds, expensive and detrimental farm programs, "urban renewal," foreign aid, and many other schemes which place the people more deeply in debt to the bankers.

Thoughtful citizens wonder why billions are spent on one program and billions on another which may duplicate it or even nullify it, such as paying some farmers not to raise crops, while at the same time building dams or canals to irrigate more farm land. Crazy or stupid?

Neither. The goal is more debt. Thousands of government-sponsored methods of wasting money go on continually. Most make no sense, but they are never exposed for what they really are: siphons sucking our Nation's economic lifeblood. Billions for the bankers, debts for the people.

Controlled news and information

So-called "economic experts" write syndicated columns in hundreds of newspapers, craftily designed to prevent the people from learning the simple truth about our money system.

Sometimes commentators, educators, and politicians blame our financial conundrum on the workers for being wasteful, lazy, or stingy. Other times, they blame workers and consumers for the increase in debts and the inflation of prices, when they know the cause is the debt-money system itself.

Our people are literally drowned in charges and counter-charges designed to confuse them and keep them from understanding the unconstitutional and evil money system that is so efficiently and silently robbing the farmers, the workers, and the businessmen of the fruits of their labor and of their freedoms.

Some, who are especially vocal in their exposure of the treason against the people, are harassed by government agencies such as the EPA, OSHA, the IRS, and others, forcing them into financial strain or bankruptcy. They have been completely successful in preventing most Americans from learning the things you have read in this article.

However, in spite of their control of information, they realize many citizens are learning the truth. (There are several millions of Americans who now know the truth including former congressmen, former revenue agents, ministers, businessmen, and many others).

Therefore, to prevent armed resistance to their plunder of America, they plan to register all firearms and eventually to disarm all citizens, in violation of the 2nd Amendment to the Constitution of the United States of America. A people armed cannot be enslaved. Therefore, they only want guns in the hands of their government police or military forces--hands that are already stained with blood from countless acts of gross negligence and overt homicide, both at home and abroad.

Spread the Word and Do Something to Fix Things.

The "almost hidden" conspirators in politics, religion, education, entertainment, and the news media are working for the banker-owned United States, in a banker-owned World under a banker-owned World Government! (This is what all the talk of a New World Order promoted by Presidents Bush and Clinton is all about.)

Unfair banking policies and taxes will continue to take a larger and larger part of the annual earning of the people and put them into the pockets of the bankers and their political agents. Increasing government regulations will prevent citizen protest and opposition to their control.

It is possible that your grandchildren will own neither home nor car, but will live in "government owned" apartments and ride to work in "government owned" buses (both paying interest to the bankers), and be allowed to keep just enough of their earnings to buy a minimum of food and clothing while their rulers wallow in luxury. In Asia and eastern Europe it is called "communism;" in America it is called "Democracy" and "Capitalism."

America will not shake off her Banker-controlled dictatorship as long as the people are ignorant of the hidden controllers. Banking concerns, which control most of the governments of the nations, and most sources of information, seem to have us completely within their grasp. They are afraid of only one thing: an awakened patriotic citizenry, armed with the truth, and with a trust in God for deliverance. This material has informed you about their iniquitous system. What you do with it is in your hands.

WHAT YOU CAN DO

Pray for America's release from this wicked money control, which is at the root of our debts and wars..

Send copies of this article to officials in your State and Local government, to school board members, principals, teachers, ministers, neighbors, etc. Ask them for their comments..

Write letters to elected or appointed officials. Write "letters- to-the-editor" to newspapers. Most small towns and suburban newspapers are not totally controlled, while most of the big city newspapers are..

Give or mail them out by the hundreds to awaken and educate other Americans to this fantastic plunder of the working people of America. The cost to you is VERY LITTLE compared to the BILLIONS in money and property being STOLEN from our people.

THIS IS NOT COPYRIGHTED, PRINT OUT A COPY AND SHARE IT!



Christian Foundations of America

Judgment Day Perspectives

By Eli James. E-Newsletter Volume IV, #7, November 14, 2007.

 Christian Foundations of America

By Pastor Eli James

Church of the Restoration of True Israel

Here is Pastor John Robinson’s Charge to the Pilgrim Fathers as he bade them farewell on their historic departure from Holland to the New World:

"Brethren, we are now erelong to part asunder, and the Lord knoweth whether I shall live ever to see your faces more; but whether the Lord hath appointed that or not, I charge you before God and His blessed angels to follow me no farther than I have followed Christ.

If God should reveal anything to you by any other instrument of His, be as ready to receive it as you ever were to receive any truth by my ministry; for I am very confident that the Lord hath more truth and light yet to break forth out of His Holy Word.

For my part, I cannot sufficiently bewail the condition of the reformed churches, who are come to a period in religion, and will go no farther than the instruments of their reformation. The Lutherans cannot be drawn to go any farther than what Luther saw, and the Calvinists, you see, stick fast where they were led by that great man of God, who yet saw not all things. This is a misery much to be lamented; for while they were burning and shining lights in their time, yet they penetrated not into the whole counsel of God, but were they now living, would be as willing to embrace further light as that which they first received."

From this quotation, we can see that the Pilgrims who founded the first Colony at Plymouth Rock were committed Protestants intent on practicing their faith without government interference. This is the ideal upon which America, the world’s first Christian Republic, was founded. The anti-Christ and his duped followers bristle at this claim, but it is the absolute Truth, even though the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution of the United States do not explicitly state this fact. It will become very plain herein that the reason these documents do not contain such an explicit statement is because the Founders were very concerned not to promote one particular denomination over another. It is not true that any of them were anti-Christian, and that goes for John Adams and Thomas Jefferson, as well.

Today, liberals and internationalists have distorted the factual record by claiming that the founders were themselves non-Christian in orientation. Anyone who makes such a statement is either ignorant or insincere.

In the words of Dr. D. James Kennedy:

52 of our 54 signers of the Declaration were undeniably born-again Christians. Their lives have been minutely examined, and it has been found that of the 54, 27 had a theological education, one translated and published a Bible, and another became the first president of the American Bible Society. Not only that, the first Chief Justice of the Supreme Court, John Jay, was also president of the American Bible Society. The evidence is clear—America was founded as a Christian nation. How can we replace those principles with "tolerance," "political correctness," and sex education in our schools and not expect to see the decline of morals and increase in violence, especially in schools, that we’re seeing today?  -- "Christian Roots of America"

Just because the Constitution of the United States fails to mention God is no reason to conclude that the Founders had any anti-Christian bias. Since the US Constitution is a document that specifically LIMITS THE POWER OF THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT to the duties and responsibilities specifically outlined in the Constitution, there was no need to reiterate statements contained in the various State Constitutions, which are cited below. The entire debate between the Federalists and the anti-Federalists that led up to the US Constitution bears this out, with the Bill of Rights having been added to ensure that the Federal Government cannot intrude upon the rights of the sovereign citizens of the various States. As such, the Federal Government can only be seen as AN AGENCY OF THE UNIFIED STATES AND THE PEOPLE WHO LIVE IN THOSE STATES. Obviously, the modern federalists/socialists have turned this principle on its head, working feverishly, on behalf of the international corporations and federal bureaucracies, to undermine this basic foundational principle.

Here is what the PREAMBLE of the BILL OF RIGHTS states:

"The conventions of a number of the States having at the time of their adopting the Constitution, expressed a desire, in order to prevent misconstruction or abuse of its powers, that further declaratory and RESTRICTIVE CLAUSES should be added: And as extending the ground of PUBLIC CONFIDENCE in the Government, will best insure the beneficent ends of its institution."

Do you see from this language that the United States Constitution is designed to limit, restrict, and prevent the Federal Government from overreaching its defined powers? In fact, there would be no Federal Government were it not for the approval and consent of the original State Conventions.  The bureaucratic mentality that rules America today is as foreign to this concept as both communism and monopolism. What we are seeing today is INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FASCISM, a system of government in which the Multinationals and the advocates of BIG GOVERNMENT are combining to form a world supergovernment. In fact, governments and corporations have become indistinguishable entities working together for maximum profit and people control. This is George Orwell’s total dictatorship right before our very eyes, but so few are able to see it! The war in Iraq is a perfect example of Big Government and Big Business (the Bush Administration, Halliburton, Bechtel, Blackwater, etc.) working together for mutual fascism…in the name of "democracy."

Thanks to modern liberalism’s promotion of Big Government and social control, WORLD GOVERNMENT has intruded itself into our midst, and its promoters and advocates are determined to have their SUPERGOVERNMENT at the expense of the Constitution. This is why the Federal Government is no longer serving the people of the United States. The US Constitution is the main obstacle standing in the way of TOTAL DICTATORSHIP. We must defend it with our very lives! All government agencies have been infiltrated by internationalists, both corporate and socialist, who want to replace the US Constitution with the UN Charter, or various international "treaties" that are written by corporate lawyers! We right wing "kooks" have been warning against this for decades, while the sincere liberals have been playing right into the hands of the internationalists, by advocating greater centralized control. The time has come for liberals who are truly concerned with civil rights to give up their fantasy that Big Government has the peoples’ interests at heart! This is an insanely ridiculous illusion! What we have today is runaway government, that is accountable to no one and which utterly ignores the restrictive language of the Constitution it is sworn to uphold.

Anyone who does not understand that the Constitution of the United States establishes the Federal Government as an agency of the several States does not understand the Constitution. It has become very obvious that this SOLICITOR/AGENT relationship has been severely undermined, due to the CENTRALIST and DICTATORIAL mindset of socialists and liberals who have infected our country’s political thinking in the last century. The Founding Fathers are turning in their graves, seeing how we have allowed the US Constitution to be used as toilet paper by those socialists and liberals who wish to RULE rather than SERVE.

A perfect example of how these traitors are trying to OVERTHROW the Constitution is the REVERSAL of Constitutional language of the First Amendment, which reads as follows:

"Congress SHALL MAKE NO LAW respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof…"

It is abundantly clear that this language IN NO WAY authorizes any government official to deprive ANY US CITIZEN of his or her right to practice their own religion as they see fit. Yet, we are constantly bombarded with news stories telling us that this judge or that judge has ruled that Christians cannot pray in public school or cannot use a public building to have Christian meetings after school. At the same time, these hypocrites have no problems with Jews, Muslims, or Secular Humanists using public facilities for the same purpose!!!! In fact, non-Christian religions are discussed in public schools in the name of "tolerance," while Christianity, the religion that made America possible, IS BEING OUTLAWED!

This being the case, how is it possible that government officials so blatantly defy the Constitution? The reason is that, through a process of gradual encroachment of federal power over State and Citizen rights, the language of the Constitution has been systematically ignored. In other words, the FIRST AMENDMENT has been invalidated by those hypocrites known as judges, lawyers, and politicians; and this includes the Supreme Court itself.

How have they done this? They have done this by replacing the words of the First Amendment with an UNWRITTEN LAW, which states "separation of church and state." The fact that this language DOES NOT OCCUR in the US Constitution is no obstacle to these hypocrites. As long as nobody objects to what they have done, they will continue to ride roughshod over the rights of the American people, thus denying us our right to freely practice our civil liberties, one of which is the CONSTITUTIONAL GUARANTEE THAT THE GOVERNMENT SHALL NOT MAKE ANY LAW RESPECTIVE TO OUR RIGHT TO FREEDOM OF RELIGION AND THE FREE EXERCISE THEREOF.

But the un-Constitutional expression, "separation of church and state," which has become the Tyrant’s official, twisted interpretation of the First Amendment’s guarantee of non-governmental interference, has taken the place of the actual words composed by our founding Fathers. The main culprits in this subversion of the constitution are federal judges, leftist lawyers, such as those in the ACLU, and left-wing politicians who want the government to dictate to the rest of us how we should live and think.

America, are you going to tolerate this? Are you going to tolerate this un-Constitutional substitution of an unwritten law for the WRITTEN LAW? For this violation of the Public Trust, these hypocrites are guilty of TREASON, for they have subverted the Constitution in favor of their own CORPORATE/SOCIALIST/CENTRALIST AGENDA, WHICH IS EXPRESSLY FORBIDDEN BY THE Constitution itself. In fact, the whole apparatus of the Welfare State is itself un-Constitutional because it is a blatant imposition of Federal power over the States and the Sovereign Citizens, which forces the productive citizens to subsidize the non-productive, whether they are able-bodied or not. This is a totally corrupt system of federalized control, posing as "welfare." The self-serving Fraternity of lawyers, judges, and politicians, with the complicity of their Corporate pals, academic stooges, and liberal media, has done this while the Sheeple have slept. It is time for the Sheeple to demand that their erstwhile servants OBEY THE LAW. The people we have hired have become our MASTERS!

Christianity Recognized in the Constitutions of the Several States

This system of institutionalized hypocrisy pretends that America never had any Christian basis for government. You should know that a hypocrite’s favorite sport is lying for personal gain. Aside from the fact that Common Law is based on Biblical Principles going back hundreds of years, the fact is that the Constitutions of all 50 States declare that they owe their allegiance to God, and many of them specifically state that Christianity should be the foundational religion.

If you don’t believe it, here is the proof:

"And forasmuch as the free Fruition of such Liberties and Privileges as Humanity, Civility and Christianity call for, as is due to every Man and his Place and Proportion…" -- State of Connecticut, 1776.

"Every person who shall be chosen a member of either house, or appointed to any office or place of trust, must before taking his seat, or entering upon the execution of his office, shall take the following oath, or affirmation..to wit: ‘I, _________, do profess faith in God the Father, and in Jesus Christ His only Son, and in the Holy Ghost, one God, blessed for evermore; and I do acknowledge the holy scriptures of the Old and New Testament to be given by divine inspiration’…" -- Article 22, State of Delaware, 1776.

"…as it is the duty of every man to worship God in such manner as he thinks most acceptable to him; all persons, professing the Christian religion, are equally entitled to protection in their religious liberty…" -- Art. XXXIII, State of Maryland, 1776.

"The representatives shall be chosen out of the residents in each county, who shall have resided at least twelve months in this State…and they shall be of the Protestant religion, and of the age of twenty-one years." -- Art. IV, State of Georgia, 1777.

"…no person, who shall deny the being of God or the truth of the Protestant religion, or the divine authority either of the Old or New Testaments…shall be capable of holding any office or place of trust or profit in the civil department within this State." -- Art. XXXII, State of North Carolina, 1776.

The elected and appointed officials must be "all of the Protestant religion." – Art. III, State of South Carolina, 1778.

"…the people of this commonwealth have a right to invest their legislature with power to authorize and require…to provide for the institution of the public worship of God, and for the support and maintenance of public Protestant teachers…" – Chapter I, Article III, State of Massachusetts, 1780.

"And each member (of the house of representatives), before he takes his seat, shall make and subscribe to the following declaration, viz: ‘I do believe in one God, the Creator and Governor of the Universe, the rewarder of the good and the punisher of the wicked. And I do acknowledge the scriptures of the Old and New Testament to be given by divine inspiration, and own and profess the Protestant religion." -- State Constitution of Vermont, July 8 1777.

If these are not State-authorized professions of the Christian faith, I don’t know what is!!! Those who claim the Founders were mere "deists" will have a hard time explaining these clear expressions of Christian ideology in the State Constitutions. The likelihood that any of these State Conventions would choose non-Christians to represent them at the Constitutional Convention is far-fetched, to say the least.

In addition, all of the other States of this Union have statements in their Constitutions acknowledging God as the Provider and source of our rights and liberties. Here is a link that will give you a listing of all Fifty States: http://neprimer.com/50StatesAcknowledgeGod.htm

As explained earlier, the reason that the US Constitution does not address Christianity specifically is because the purpose of the Constitution was to define the limits of the Federal Government, as an Agency employed by the Several States. As such, the Founders did not find it necessary to reiterate all statements contained within the Constitutions of the Several Sates, although there is an implied recognition of Jesus Christ in Article VII, which states, "Done in Convention by the Unanimous Consent of the States present the Seventeenth Day of September in the year of Our Lord, one thousand seven hundred and eighty seven."

If the Founders were deists or agnostics, as many falsely believe, such men would surely have objected to the phrase, "year of Our Lord." The representatives of the Thirteen States all came from Christian Republics. These Christian men came together IN COVENANT RELATIONSHIP WITH GOD AND JESUS CHRIST, to flesh out the Constitution of the United States, creating a legal document, which spells out the duties of the agency thereby created. And the First Amendment very clearly states that this agency is to STAY OUT OF THE RELIGIOUS AFFAIRS OF BOTH STATE AND CITIZEN.

It is patently obvious that the Federal Government is today DOING THE EXACT OPPOSITE OF WHAT THE CONSTITUTION DEMANDS.

The Christian Faith of the Founding Fathers

Many liberals and other deniers of the Christian Faith have made numerous statements to the effect that the Founders were not Christians at all, but agnostics, deists, or even atheists. Let us look at the evidence, from their own lips and pens:

"It cannot be emphasized too strongly or too often that this great Nation was founded not by religionists, but by Christians; not on religions, but on the Gospel of Jesus Christ. For that reason alone, people of other faiths have been afforded freedom of worship here." Patrick Henry.

"We have staked the whole future of American civilization, not upon the power of government, far from it. We have staked our future…upon the capacity of each and all of us to govern ourselves, to sustain ourselves, according to the Commandments of God." -- James Madison.

Republics demanded virtue. Monarchies could rely on coercion and "dazzling splendor" to suppress self-interest or factions; republics relied on the goodness of the people to put aside private interest for public good. The imperatives of virtue attached all sorts of desiderata to the republican citizen: simplicity, frugality, sobriety, simple manners, Christian benevolence, duty to the polity. Republics called on other virtues—spiritedness, courage—to protect the polity from external threats. Tyrants kept standing armies; republics relied on free yeomen, defending their own land. -- James Monroe

 

"Our Constitution was made only for a religious and moral people. It is wholly inadequate for the government of any other." -- John Adams.

"The general principles upon which the Fathers achieved independence were the general principals of Christianity… I will avow that I believed and now believe that those general principles of Christianity are as eternal and immutable as the existence and attributes of God…[July 4th] ought to be commemorated as the day of deliverance by solemn acts of devotion to God Almighty." – John Adams, in a letter written to Abigail on the day the Declaration was approved by Congress

"Man will ultimately be governed by God or by Tyrants." -- Benjamin Franklin.

"Resistance to tyranny is obedience to God." -- Thomas Jefferson.

I am a real Christian, that is to say, a disciple of the doctrines of Jesus. I have little doubt that our whole country will soon be rallied to the unity of our Creator ". – Thomas Jefferson.

"The people know it is impossible to rightly govern without God and the Bible." – George Washington.

"The Law given from Sinai was a civil and municipal as well as a moral and religious code." -- John Quincy Adams. Letters to his son. p. 61

"If we abide by the principles taught in the Bible, our country will go on prospering." -- Daniel Webster.

The anti-Christian elitists, who insist that the Founders of this Christian Republic were not Christians at all, are spinmasters. Most of them have no idea what they are talking about. They just parrot the liberal agenda. These same critics typically advocate one or another form of socialism, Welfare State, totalitarianism, or paternalism. Most of them are the unwitting tools of the anti-Christ: the globalist effort of the House of Rothschild to establish a NEW WORLD ORDER via the United Nations Organization, which has always promoted a communistic, paternalistic SUPERSTATE, in which the subjects derive their "rights" from the very elitists who would deprive us of our GOD-GIVEN rights.

Official Acts of Congress Promoted Christianity

Anti-Christian propagandists like to quote the Founders out of context in order to argue their case that America was not founded as an officially Christian Nation. The fact that neither the Declaration of Independence nor the Constitution of the United States mention Christianity is irrelevant. Those documents had very specific legal and political purposes. The fact is that the entire history of America, from its beginning, involves the question of freedom of religion; and the foremost promoters of religious liberty, since the founding of our Country, have been the Christians of America.

As explained above, the Federal Constitution was simply the legal document by which the Three Branches of the Federal Government were defined, instituted and constrained. The United States Constitution is properly conceived of as defining the terms of employment and service in the variously constituted Branches and Departments. Since the several States had already recognized Christianity as their official religion, there was no need to reiterate this fact in a document, which was designed to provide the functioning rules for this Federal Agency. Do you think that these men could have foreseen the day that the Federal Government would seek to destroy Christianity? The actions of the First Congress speak louder than the apparent lack of words. These will be elaborated below. For those supposed "deists," the tradition of having a Christian minister open Congressional sessions with a prayer began from Day One.

Likewise, the specific purpose of the Declaration of Independence was to sever the political and economic ties between the Colonies and the Two-Headed Monster of the British Crown and the Bank of England. It is absurd to suggest that every document the Founders produced must contain some formal declaration of Christianity.

The actions of the Founders and subsequent Sessions of Congress prove, beyond a shadow of a doubt, that they endorsed Christianity at every turn.

From the official history of the Library of Congress, we have this synopsis (http://www.loc.gov/exhibits/religion/rel04.html) :

 

IV. Religion and the Congress of the Confederation, 1774-89

The Continental-Confederation Congress, a legislative body that governed the United States from 1774 to 1789, contained an extraordinary number of deeply religious men. The amount of energy that Congress invested in encouraging the practice of religion in the new nation exceeded that expended by any subsequent American national government. Although the Articles of Confederation did not officially authorize Congress to concern itself with religion, the citizenry did not object to such activities. This lack of objection suggests that both the legislators and the public considered it appropriate for the national government to promote a nondenominational, nonpolemical Christianity.

Congress appointed chaplains for itself and the armed forces, sponsored the publication of a Bible, imposed Christian morality on the armed forces, and granted public lands to promote Christianity among the Indians. National days of thanksgiving and of "humiliation, fasting, and prayer" were proclaimed by Congress at least twice a year throughout the war. Congress was guided by "covenant theology," a Reformation doctrine especially dear to New England Puritans, which held that God bound himself in an agreement with a nation and its people. This agreement stipulated that they "should be prosperous or afflicted, according as their general Obedience or Disobedience thereto appears." Wars and revolutions were, accordingly, considered afflictions, as divine punishments for sin, from which a nation could rescue itself by repentance and reformation.

The first national government of the United States, was convinced that the "public prosperity" of a society depended on the vitality of its religion. Nothing less than a "spirit of universal reformation among all ranks and degrees of our citizens," Congress declared to the American people, would "make us a holy, that so we may be a happy people."

If Congress was anti-Christian, why would they appoint military chaplains of the Christian faith? Why would they sponsor the publication of the Bible? Why would they promote Christianity among the Indians?

These facts just go to show that the current, well-orchestrated attack upon America’s Christian foundations is a cleverly crafted campaign of historical distortion. These deceivers take great pains to take quotations out of context and cover up essential historical facts.

Here are some of the relevant historical facts:

The Reverend Jacob Duche was the unofficial Chaplain of Congress from 1774 until July 9, 1776, when that body made his Chaplaincy official.

Here is the text of one of the first prayer recited by Rev. Duche, Sept. 7, 1774:

"O, Lord, our Heavenly Father, High and Mighty, King of Kings and Lord of Lords, who dost from Thy Throne behold all the dwellers of the earth, and weighest with power supreme and uncontrolled over all the Kingdoms, Empires and Governments, look down in mercy, we beseech Thee, on these our American States, who have fled to Thee for the rod of the oppressor, and thrown themselves on Thy gracious protection, desiring to be henceforth dependent only on Thee; to Thee have they appealed for the righteousness of their cause; to Thee do they now look up for that countenance and support, which Thou alone canst give; take the, therefore, Heavenly Father, under Thy nurturing care; give them wisdom in Council and valour in the field; defeat the malicious designs of our cruel adversaries; convince them of the unrighteousness of their cause; and if they persist in their sanguinary purposes, O! Let the voice of Thine own unerring justice, sounding in their heats, constrain them to drop the weapons of war, from their unnerved hands in the day of battle! Be Thou present, O God of wisdom, and direct the councils of this honorable assembly; enable them to settle things on the best and surest foundation. That the scene of blood may speedily be closed; that order, harmony and peace may be effectually restored, and truth and justice, religion and piety, prevail and flourish amongst Thy people. Preserve the health of their bodies and the vigour of their minds; shower down on them and the millions they here represent, such temporal blessings, as Thou seest expedient for them in this world, and crown them with everlasting glory in the world to come. All this we ask in the name and through the merits of Jesus Christ, Thy Son and our Saviour, Amen.

Reflecting the nature of the times, the Rev. Duche defected to the British!!! He was immediately replaced by William White and George Duffield.

One of the first acts of the 1776 Congress was to appoint a three-man Committee to design the Seal of the United States. This Committee was composed of John Adams, Benjamin Franklin and Thomas Jefferson. This Committee proposed a scene from the Bible: the Israelites passing through the Red Sea! Although the proposal was never adopted, it reveals the Biblical orientation of these three men.

Previous to the Declaration of Independence, Congress issued a Proclamation declaring a Day of Prayer and Fasting, which read, "…to confess and bewail our manifold sins and transgressions, and by a sincere repentance and amendment of life, appease his [God's] righteous displeasure, and through the merits and mediation of Jesus Christ, obtain his pardon and forgiveness." (May 17, 1776.)

The first Congressional Thanksgiving Day Proclamation urged the People to "…join the penitent confession of their manifold sins…that it may please God, through the merits of Jesus Christ, mercifully to forgive and blot them out of remembrance." (Dec. 18, 1777.)

So, the Founders weren’t Christians, eh? Documents such as these number in the thousands, but the history distorters, who have taken control of the media, libraries and universities, will tell you that these men were atheists, deists, or uncommitted persons. These documents speak for themselves.

During the Revolutionary War, Congress made it a point to make Bibles available to the public. Since the supply from Britain was cut off, Congress placed an order from Scotland, Holland and other sources, by a Proclamation dated Sept. 11, 1777.

After the War, on Sept 12, 1782, Congress officially sanctioned the production of the Bible by printer, Robert Aitkens.

In 1782, the United States Congress voted this resolution: "The Congress of the United States recommends and approves the Holy Bible for use in all schools."

 

William Holmes McGuffey, the author of the McGuffey Reader, which was used for over 100 years in our public schools with over 125 million copies sold until it was stopped in 1963, said,  "The Christian religion is the religion of our country. From it are derived our notions on the character of God, on the great moral Governor of the universe. On its doctrines are founded the peculiarities of our free institutions. From no source has the author drawn more conspicuously than from the sacred Scriptures. From all these extracts from the Bible I make no apology."

President Lincoln called McGuffey the "Schoolmaster of the Nation." If you will take careful notice, our nation’s decline in educational standards and performance began in 1963, with the removal of the McGuffey Readers from the public schools.

 

Full text of Patrick Henry’s Revolutionary speech:

 

Give Me Liberty Or Give Me Death

Patrick Henry, March 23, 1775.

No man thinks more highly than I do of the patriotism, as well as abilities, of the very worthy gentlemen who have just addressed the House. But different men often see the same subject in different lights; and, therefore, I hope it will not be thought disrespectful to those gentlemen if, entertaining as I do opinions of a character very opposite to theirs, I shall speak forth my sentiments freely and without reserve. This is no time for ceremony. The questing before the House is one of awful moment to this country. For my own part, I consider it as nothing less than a question of freedom or slavery; and in proportion to the magnitude of the subject ought to be the freedom of the debate. It is only in this way that we can hope to arrive at truth, and fulfill the great responsibility which we hold to God and our country. Should I keep back my opinions at such a time, through fear of giving offense, I should consider myself as guilty of treason towards my country, and of an act of disloyalty toward the Majesty of Heaven, which I revere above all earthly kings.

Mr. President, it is natural to man to indulge in the illusions of hope. We are apt to shut our eyes against a painful truth, and listen to the song of that siren till she transforms us into beasts. Is this the part of wise men, engaged in a great and arduous struggle for liberty? Are we disposed to be of the number of those who, having eyes, see not, and, having ears, hear not, the things which so nearly concern their temporal salvation? For my part, whatever anguish of spirit it may cost, I am willing to know the whole truth; to know the worst, and to provide for it.

I have but one lamp by which my feet are guided, and that is the lamp of experience. I know of no way of judging of the future but by the past. And judging by the past, I wish to know what there has been in the conduct of the British ministry for the last ten years to justify those hopes with which gentlemen have been pleased to solace themselves and the House. Is it that insidious smile with which our petition has been lately received? Trust it not, sir; it will prove a snare to your feet. Suffer not yourselves to be betrayed with a kiss. Ask yourselves how this gracious reception of our petition comports with those warlike preparations which cover our waters and darken our land. Are fleets and armies necessary to a work of love and reconciliation? Have we shown ourselves so unwilling to be reconciled that force must be called in to win back our love? Let us not deceive ourselves, sir. These are the implements of war and subjugation; the last arguments to which kings resort. I ask gentlemen, sir, what means this martial array, if its purpose be not to force us to submission? Can gentlemen assign any other possible motive for it? Has Great Britain any enemy, in this quarter of the world, to call for all this accumulation of navies and armies? No, sir, she has none. They are meant for us: they can be meant for no other. They are sent over to bind and rivet upon us those chains which the British ministry have been so long forging. And what have we to oppose to them? Shall we try argument? Sir, we have been trying that for the last ten years. Have we anything new to offer upon the subject? Nothing. We have held the subject up in every light of which it is capable; but it has been all in vain. Shall we resort to entreaty and humble supplication? What terms shall we find which have not been already exhausted? Let us not, I beseech you, sir, deceive ourselves. Sir, we have done everything that could be done to avert the storm which is now coming on. We have petitioned; we have remonstrated; we have supplicated; we have prostrated ourselves before the throne, and have implored its interposition to arrest the tyrannical hands of the ministry and Parliament. Our petitions have been slighted; our remonstrances have produced additional violence and insult; our supplications have been disregarded; and we have been spurned, with contempt, from the foot of the throne! In vain, after these things, may we indulge the fond hope of peace and reconciliation. There is no longer any room for hope. If we wish to be free-- if we mean to preserve inviolate those inestimable privileges for which we have been so long contending--if we mean not basely to abandon the noble struggle in which we have been so long engaged, and which we have pledged ourselves never to abandon until the glorious object of our contest shall be obtained--we must fight! I repeat it, sir, we must fight! An appeal to arms and to the God of hosts is all that is left us!

They tell us, sir, that we are weak; unable to cope with so formidable an adversary. But when shall we be stronger? Will it be the next week, or the next year? Will it be when we are totally disarmed, and when a British guard shall be stationed in every house? Shall we gather strength by irresolution and inaction? Shall we acquire the means of effectual resistance by lying supinely on our backs and hugging the delusive phantom of hope, until our enemies shall have bound us hand and foot? Sir, we are not weak if we make a proper use of those means which the God of nature hath placed in our power. The millions of people, armed in the holy cause of liberty, and in such a country as that which we possess, are invincible by any force which our enemy can send against us. Besides, sir, we shall not fight our battles alone. There is a just God who presides over the destinies of nations, and who will raise up friends to fight our battles for us. The battle, sir, is not to the strong alone; it is to the vigilant, the active, the brave. Besides, sir, we have no election. If we were base enough to desire it, it is now too late to retire from the contest. There is no retreat but in submission and slavery! Our chains are forged! Their clanking may be heard on the plains of Boston! The war is inevitable--and let it come! I repeat it, sir, let it come.

It is in vain, sir, to extenuate the matter. Gentlemen may cry, Peace, Peace-- but there is no peace. The war is actually begun! The next gale that sweeps from the north will bring to our ears the clash of resounding arms! Our brethren are already in the field! Why stand we here idle? What is it that gentlemen wish? What would they have? Is life so dear, or peace so sweet, as to be purchased at the price of chains and slavery? Forbid it, Almighty God! I know not what course others may take; but as for me, give me liberty or give me death!

The reason I have highlighted Henry’s references to God is because these references are often omitted by the Liberal/Left/Socialist/Secular Humanist versions quoted by these deceivers. I also underlined the direct references from the Bible. The painful Truth is that the Modern anti-Christs have spent an enormous amount of time and resources to create a myth, that myth being the notion that America is not a Christian Nation.

On the contrary, America is most definitely a Christian nation. It’s about time that America’s Christians start fighting back against our current oppressors as the Founders did against theirs.

Conclusion

It is astounding how far the current crop of corrupt, Corporate Socialist deceivers will go to distort history in order to convince themselves and you that their fables represent history. The fact is that the American Revolution was prosecuted by a Christian people, observing the Christian principles of individual liberty and responsibility, which principles are derived from the Bible, whose war cry was "No King but Jesus." When the Revolution came, the pastors, preachers, chaplains and deacons of the various Christian churches in America had a Bible in one hand and a musket in the other. Anyone who claims otherwise does a disservice to both the Truth and history.

America was conceived, gestated and delivered as a Christian Republic. No one can prove otherwise.

Depleted Uranium Poisoning

Depleted Uranium Poisoning

In this brave new world of enlightenment and new age spirituality, we as Israelites find it increasingly difficult to believe the extent to which our eternal enemy will go and has gone to try to destroy us. The more I learn, the more I realize how long they have been trying to kill us and how much they hate us. The more I learn the more determined I am to help our people, at least in the only way I can.    

In June 2003, the World Health Organization announced in a press release that global cancer rates would increase 50 percent by 2020. Then they went on to list the possible causes for this. Chief among them being obesity. What they fail to acknowledge is what our enemies (who also run the WHO) are doing to make sure that this prediction comes true.

Former World Bank head Robert McNamara said, "One must take draconian measures of demographic reduction against the will of the populations. Reducing the birthrate has proved to be impossible or insufficient. One must therefore increase the mortality rate. How? By natural means. Famine and sickness."

"Military men are just dumb stupid animals to be used as pawns in foreign policy." -- Henry Kissinger, quoted in "Kiss the Boys Goodbye: How the United States Betrayed Its Own POW's in Vietnam".

It’s not strange that Mr. Kissinger feels this way about our military, as it is made up predominantly of Israelites, especially during the time of this quote.

Since 1991, the U.S. has staged four nuclear wars using depleted uranium weaponry, which, like Agent Orange, meets the U.S. government definition of Weapons of Mass Destruction. Vast regions in the Middle East and Central Asia have been permanently contaminated with radiation. And what about our soldiers? Terry Jemison of the Department of Veterans Affairs reported recently that "Gulf-era veterans" now on medical disability since 1991 number 518,739, with only 7,035 reported wounded in Iraq in that same 14-year period. 
 
The American Free Press reported that eight out of 20 men who served in one unit in the 2003 U.S. military offensive in Iraq now have malignancies. That means that 40 percent of the soldiers in that unit have developed malignancies in just 16 months.

This, my friends, is how they get the cancer rate to 50 percent and reduce the population and birth rate at the same time.    

When a DU shell is fired, it ignites upon impact. Uranium, plus traces of plutonium and americium, vaporize into tiny, ceramic particles of radioactive dust. Once inhaled, uranium oxides lodge in the body and emit radiation indefinitely. A single particle of DU lodged in a lymph node can devastate the entire immune system. The particulates target the DNA causing a myriad of diseases, which are difficult to define.

Soldiers developing malignancies so quickly since 2003 can be expected to develop multiple cancers from independent causes. This phenomenon has been reported by doctors in hospitals treating civilians following NATO bombing with DU in Yugoslavia in 1998-1999 and the U.S. military invasion of Iraq using DU for the first time in 1991. Medical experts report that this phenomenon of multiple malignancies from unrelated causes has been unknown until now and is a new syndrome associated with internal DU exposure
 
Just 467 U.S. personnel were wounded in the three-week Persian Gulf War in 1990-1991. Out of 580,400 soldiers who served in Gulf War I, 11,000 are dead, and by 2000 there were 325,000 on permanent medical disability. This astounding number of disabled vets means that a decade later, 56 percent of those soldiers who served now have medical problems. 
 
The number of disabled vets reported up to 2000 has been increasing by 43,000 every year. Brad Flohr of the Department of Veterans Affairs said that he believes there are more disabled vets now than even after World War II.

Having been in the military and overseas, I can attest to the fact that the first thing a soldier wants when he gets home is a little attention from his significant other. 
 
Not only were soldiers exposed to DU on and off the battlefields, but also they brought it home. DU in the semen of soldiers internally contaminated their wives, partners and girlfriends. Tragically, some women in their 20s and 30s who were sexual partners of exposed soldiers developed endometriosis and were forced to have hysterectomies because of health problems. 
 
In a group of 251 soldiers from a study group in Mississippi who had all had normal babies before the Gulf War, 67 percent of their post-war babies were born with severe birth defects. They were born with missing legs, arms, organs or eyes or had immune system and blood diseases. In some veterans' families now, the only normal or healthy members of the family are the children born before the war.

A Japanese professor, Dr. K. Yagasaki, has calculated that 800 tons of DU is the atomicity equivalent of 83,000 Nagasaki bombs. The U.S. has used more DU since 1991 than the atomicity equivalent of 400,000 Nagasaki bombs. Four nuclear wars indeed, and 10 times the amount of radiation released into the atmosphere from atmospheric testing!

One efficient way of reducing the population of the world is by the deliberate spread of disease. Bertrand Russell, an advisor to several presidents, wrote in his book, The Impact of Science on Society,

 "At present the population of the world is increasing... War so far has had no great effect on this increase... I do not pretend that birth control is the only way in which population can be kept from increasing. There are others... If a Black Death could be spread throughout the world once in every generation, survivors could procreate freely without making the world too full... the state of affairs might be somewhat unpleasant, but what of it? Really high-minded people are indifferent to suffering, especially that of others."

The World Health Organization is the Population control/Euthanasia/Genocide arm of the United Nations.  The United Nations ultimate goals are 1) the redistribution of wealth throughout the world, 2) a vast and rapid reduction in the population of the world for "sustainable development" by the year 2050, and 3) the elimination of nation-states with the implementation of One World Government.

I am currently at work on a solution for our people who become contaminated with DU. 

It will be an herbal-based therapy for those who no longer wish to be poked and prodded by our enemies, whose goal is not to treat disease, but to see how their plan is progressing. 

Submitted by Rik Huffman

Health Correspondent

riksremedies@gmail.com

George Washington’s Prophetic Vision

George Washington’s Prophetic Vision
(Anticipating Three Historical Developments in the Future of America)

(Originally published by Wesley Bradshaw. Copied from a reprint in the National Tribune, Vol. 4, No. 12, Dec. 1880.)

The last time I ever saw Anthony Sherman was on the Fourth of July, 1859, in Independence Square. He was then ninety-nine years old, his dimming eyes rekindled as he gazed upon Independence Hall, which he had come to visit once more. "I want to tell an incident in Washington’s life – one which no one alive knows except myself; and which, if you live, you will before long see verified."
 
He said, "From the opening of the Revolution, we experienced all phases of fortune, good and ill. The darkest period we ever had, I think, was when Washington, after several reverses, retreated to Valley Forge, where he resolved to pass the winter of 1777. Ah! I often saw tears coursing down our dear commander’s careworn cheeks, as he conversed with a confidential officer about the condition of his soldiers. You have doubtless heard the story of Washington’s Going to the thicket to pray. Well, he also used to pray to God in secret for aid and comfort."
 
"One day, I remember well, the chilly winds whistled through the leafless trees. Though the sky was cloudless and the sun shone brightly, he remained alone in his quarters nearly all afternoon. When he came out, I noticed that his face was a shade paler than usual, and there seemed to be something on his mind of more than ordinary importance. Returning just after dusk, he dispatched an orderly to the quarters of the officer mentioned who was in attendance at the time. After a preliminary conversation of about half an hour, Washington, gazing upon his companion with that strange look of dignity that he alone could command, said to the latter:
"I do not know whether it is due to the anxiety of my mind, or what, but this afternoon, as I was preparing a dispatch, something seemed to disturb me. Looking up, I beheld, standing opposite me, a singularly beautiful being. So astonished was I, for I had given strict orders not to be disturbed, that it was some moments before I found language to inquire the cause of the visit. A second, a third, and even a fourth time did I repeat my question, but received no answer from my mysterious visitor, except a slight raising of the eyes. By this time I felt strange sensations spreading through me, and I would have risen, but the riveted gaze of the being before me rendered volition impossible. I assayed once more to speak, but my tongue had become useless, as though lit had become paralyzed. A new influence, mysterious, potent, irresistible, took possession. All I could do was to gaze steadily, vacantly at my unknown visitor. Gradually the surrounding atmosphere seemed to become filled with sensations, and grew luminous. Everything about me seemed to rarefy, including the mysterious visitor.
 
"I began to feel as one dying, or rather to experience the sensations which I have sometimes imagined accompany dissolution. I did not think, I did not reason, I did not move; all were alike impossible. I was only conscious of gazing fixedly, vacantly at my companion.

SETTLEMENT AND EXPANSION OF THE UNITED STATES

"Presently I heard a voice saying, ‘Son of the Republic, look and learn,’ while at the same time my visitor extended an arm eastwardly. I now beheld a heavy vapor at some distance rising fold upon fold. This gradually dissipated, and I looked upon a strange scene. Before me lay spread out in one vast plain all the countries of the world – Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. I saw rolling and tossing between Europe and America the billows of the Atlantic, and between Asia and America lay the Pacific.
 
"’Son of the Republic,’ said the same mysterious voice as before, ‘look and learn.’ At that moment I beheld a dark, shadowy being as an angel standing, or rather floating, in mid-air between Europe and America. Dipping water out of the ocean in the hollow of his hand, he cast some on Europe. Immediately a cloud raised from these countries, and joined in mid-ocean. For a while it remained stationary, and then moved slowly westward until it enveloped America in its murky folds. Sharp flashes of lightning gleamed through it at intervals, and I heard the smothered groans and cries of the American people. A second time the angel dipped water from the ocean and sprinkled it out as before, the dark cloud then drawn back to the ocean, in whose billows it sank from view.
 
"A third time I heard the mysterious voice saying, ‘Son of the Republic, look and learn.’ I cast my eyes upon America and beheld villages and towns and cities springing up one after another until the whole land from the Atlantic to the Pacific was dotted with them. Again I heard the mysterious voice say, ‘Son of the Republic, the end of the century cometh; look and learn.’

A CIVIL WAR ANTICIPATED

"And this time the dark, shadowy angel turned his face southward, and from Africa I saw an ill-omened specter approach our land. It flitted slowly over every town and city of the latter. The inhabitants presently set themselves in battle against each other. As I continued looking, I saw a bright angel, on whose brow rested a crown of light on which was traced the word, ‘Union,’ bearing the American flag, which he placed between the divided nation. He said, ‘Remember, ye are brethren.’ Instantly the inhabitants, casting down their weapons, became friends once more, and united around the National Standard.

AMERICA TO BE INVADED FROM ABROAD

"Again I heard the mysterious voice saying, ‘Son of the Republic, look and learn.’ At this the dark, shadowy angel placed a trumpet to his lips and blew three distinct blasts; and taking water from the ocean, he sprinkled it upon Europe, Asia, and Africa. Then my eyes beheld a fearful scene. From each of these countries arose thick black clouds that were soon joined into one: and throughout this mass there gleamed a dark red light by which I saw hordes of armed men, who, moving with the cloud, marched by land and sailed by sea to America, which country was enveloped in the volume of the cloud. And dimly I saw these vast armies devastate the whole country and burn the villages, towns, and cities that I had beheld springing up.
"As my ears listened to the thundering of the cannon, the slashing of swords, and the shouts and cries of millions in mortal combat, I again heard the mysterious voice saying, ‘Son of the Republic, look and learn.’ When the voice had ceased, the dark angel placed his trumpet once more to his mouth and blew a long and fearful blast.
"Instantly a light of as a thousand suns shone down from above me, and pierced and broke into fragments the dark cloud which enveloped America. At the same moment the angel upon whose head still shone the word ‘Union’ and who bore our national flag in one hand and a sword in the other descended from the heavens attended by legions of white spirits. These immediately joined the inhabitants of America, who I perceived were well-nigh overcome, but who, immediately taking courage again, closed up their broken ranks and renewed the battle. Again, amid the fearful noise of the conflict I heard the mysterious voice saying, ‘Son of the Republic, look and learn.’ AS the voice ceased, the shadowy angel for the last time dipped water from the ocean and sprinkled it upon America. Instantly the dark cloud rolled back, together with the armies it had brought, leaving the inhabitants of the land victorious.

AMERICA REBUILDS AGAIN

"Then, once more, I beheld the villages, towns, and cities springing up where I’d seen them before, while the bright angel, planting the azure standard he had brought in the midst of them, cried with a loud voice: ‘While the stars remain, and the heavens send down dew upon the earth, so long shall the Union last.’ And taking from his brow the crown on which blazoned the word, ‘Union,’ he placed it upon the standard while the people, kneeling down, said ‘Amen.’
 
"The scene instantly began to fade and dissolve, and I, at last, saw nothing but the rising, curling vapor I had first beheld. This also disappeared, and I found myself once more gazing upon the mysterious visitor, who in the same voice I had heard before say, ‘Son of the Republic, what you have seen is thus interpreted. Three great perils will come upon the Republic. The most fearful is the third [the help against the third peril comes in the shape of divine assistance], passing which the whole world united shall not prevail against her. Let every child of the Republic learn to live for his God, his land, and his Union.’ With these words the visitor vanished, and I started from my seat and felt that I had seen a vision wherein had been shown me the birth, the progress, and the destiny of the United States.
 
Such, my friends, said the venerable narrator, were the words I heard from Washington’s own lips, and America will do well to profit by them.
 
-- From a pamphlet distributed by the Christian Patriots Defense League, PO Box 99, Louisville IL 62858.

Profound Revolution

Profound Revolution

By
MARY M. DAVISON

Published By

THE GREATER NEBRASKAN

Omaha, Nebraska

April, 1966


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Foreword

Preface

Chapter One

The World Constitution

Chapter Two

Truth Crushed to Earth

Chapter Three

Empire Building

Chapter Four

Government By Resolution

Chapter Five

War By Resolution

Chapter Six

Financing World Empire

Chapter Seven

Communications Well In Hand

Chapter Eight

High Jinks In Finances

Chapter Nine

American Labor UN-ternationalized.

Chapter Ten

The U.S. Has Its Own International Law

Chapter Eleven

War By Resolution

Chapter Twelve

Which will It Be – US or UN?



Foreword

On December 17th, 1963, within a month after he became Chief Executive, President Lyndon Johnson appeared before the General Assembly of the United Nations and stated:

"When I entered the Congress of the United States twenty-seven years ago, it was my first great privilege to work closely with President Franklin Delano Roosevelt. As a member of the Congress I worked with him to bring about a profound but peaceful revolution.

"... That revolution brought hope and help to one-third of our nation. . . Now, on the world scale the time has come, as it came to America thirty years ago for new era of hope for that one third of mankind still beset by hunger, poverty and disease. . . . It will not be, achieved through some hopeful resolution, but through a peaceful revolution in the world."

Now we have official proclamation of a fact stated by the late Garet Garrett in the title of his book—"The Revolution Was,"—published in 1944. The New Deal Revolution was; the World Revolution is. These are facts we must accept. We must accept also that the President worked with others to bring about the one, that he is working now to bring about the other.

Before the United States becomes further involved in profound revolution all over the world, it might be well to stop, look and, listen, to contemplate the consequences of the peaceful revolution which has been kept so secret for more than a quarter of a century. One consequence of revolution has always been a change in the form of government and, of course, a new ruling class.

The Constitutional Government of the United States had established the People as rulers of this Nation. The rule was of, for and by the People. In the "profound but peaceful revolution" described by the President, the People were not consulted; they knew nothing about it. When their Constitutional Government was overthrown, the Government of, by and for the People did "perish from the earth."

We shall take the President at his word; we will accept, for the purposes of this book, the premise that there was a successful revolution during the Franklin Roosevelt administration. The "New Deal" and the "Brain Trust" symbolized the new Revolutionary Government. It is with this new revolutionary government we must deal, for this new revolutionary government of the United States has officially stated its intention of spreading this particular revolution world-wide. Neither People nor Congress are to be consulted.

The New Deal Revolution was unique. It maintained the outward forms of the old Constitutional Government; the three Departments of Government, the Executive, the Legislative and the Judicial were, to all intents and purposes, to remain. The People, unaware that the revolution had occurred, would not be aroused by the ousting of their "duly elected" President and Congress and the appointed Judiciary. If the profound and peaceful aspects were to continue, the People would have to be deceived, kept in ignorance, while the revolutionary government was quietly eased into full power and control.

Revolutions are not organized over night, nor do they form without strong central planning and direction. The facts of the New Deal Revolution are now coming to light and the forces which put the revolution in motion are fully revealed.

Astute men had long sensed the formation of a movement calculated to control the Government of the United States. The same men who instigated the revolution in 1933 were referred to by New York City's Mayor John F. Hylan as long ago as March 22nd, 1922.

"The real menace of our Republic is the invisible government which, like a giant octopus, sprawl its, slimy length over our city, state and nation. At the head is a small group of banking houses, generally referred to as 'International Bankers.' This little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run our government for their own selfish ends."

The International Bankers, referred to here by Mayor Hylan, had organized three years before this and formed a power structure dedicated to control of the world. Within this group was complete control of the money of the world and they intended to use it to the fullest advantage. They called themselves The Council on Foreign Relations. They have worked steadily on their project of world control by building world empire. Nothing has been permitted to stand in their way.

On December 9th, 1950, the Chicago Times, taking note of the menacing power of the Council on Foreign Relations, commented editorially:

"The members of the Council are persons of much more than average influence in the community. They have used the prestige that their wealth, their social position and their education have given them to lead their country toward bankruptcy and military debacle. They should look at their hands. There is blood on them."

Thus, the existence and the Satanic power of the Council on Foreign Relations was recognized by men in a position to know about it, many years ago. Many warnings such as those raised by Mayor Hylan and the Chicago Times, were uttered and fell on deaf ears.

Among the International Bankers who had formed the Council on Foreign Relations and whose descendents make up the Council today were:

The House of Rockefeller Kuhn Loeb & Company

The House of Morgan Lehman Brothers

Goldman Sachs Brown Brothers Harriman

There were and are others of course, but these provided the nucleus of the world power-house which was to work toward revolution for the establishment of a world empire to be ruled by themselves and their counterparts in Europe. The membership of the Council on Foreign Relations never exceeds 1400, more than 1,000 of whom are the educated elite who serve as the work-horses and lackeys of the billionaire element at the top.

The "Brain Trust" which moved into Washington with Roosevelt and set up the New Deal—their name for the "profound and peaceful revolution"—almost to a man, came from the headquarters training school of the Council on Foreign Relations.

Each succeeding Administration has absorbed more and more of the Council on Foreign Relations lackey staff into the government until, at last, the Kennedy administration was more than 90% a Council on Foreign Relations operation. The revolutionary government had been firmly established. The time had come for the experienced hand to move and get the worldwide revolution rolling. This, as the President stated in his speech of December 17th, 1963, he intends to do.

This little book is written at a time when the New World Order is facing a crisis. This New World Order will pass. What then? Americans who have lived through half a century under the New Order, without knowing or even suspecting that the Constitutional Government of the United States had been quietly erased, are not equipped to deal with the problem—what now?

Students in the schools have been taught for several generations that we are building a New World Order. Their parents knew nothing about it; they would not have believed it if they had been told. They have been completely absorbed in the accumulation of material wealth, a new form of wealth, peculiar to the New Order.

In the days of the Constitutional Republic, Americans worked, saved and were free and responsible. Their wealth was invested in debt-free property and in savings in the banks. They were prepared to meet the misfortunes of life as well as its responsibilities. They had wrought mightily and they managed their wealth wisely.

Then a terrible malignancy invaded the body of the Republic. The happy and prosperous people were taken into a World War. The horrors of war, however, were soon forgotten in the unprecedented prosperity of the post-war period. For the first time, individual Americans began to borrow money to pay for unearned luxuries, to gamble in over-priced stocks. They were mortgaging their future to pay for the pleasures of the present.

The People discarded the old ways of industry, economy and thrift and embarked on a dangerous policy. No longer were savings applied to the purchase of a home, as Americans had always purchased homes, with money carefully saved for the purpose. The down payment, the mortgage on future earnings, was the trade-mark of the New Order. Americans indulging in this practice went through life, burdened by debt, never really owning anything.

New devices entered the public communications field, slick magazines, radio and eventually television. These were put to work to sell new ideas and attitudes on the debt economy. Propaganda poured upon the populace day and night and soon all trace, all memory of the Old Order had disappeared. The Credit economy had been replaced by the Debt economy. Propaganda sustained the New Order. The future was mortgaged to the hilt. Propaganda drugged Americans accepted the theory that we do not need to worry about public debt, we owe it to ourselves, in other words, we do not have to pay the debt because we owe it to Americans. If we had owed it to foreigners we would have had to pay it. This idea was an expansion of the theory of the New Deal (New Order), that Americans could not hold or acquire gold or redeem government paper in gold. Foreigners can and do.

A state of perpetual war has come with the New Order and rebellious youth is now challenging the system which imposes upon them the debts and taxes resulting from the profligacy of other generations. They are challenging the right of any government to demand of them the sacrifices which the perpetual war of the New Order demands. Their rebellion is the crisis now confronting the New World Order.

American youth may be coming to the realization that the New World Order is not going to work to their advantage. They will have to make some important decisions, which should be based on solid facts, if they are to change things for the betterment of themselves and their children. They will have to learn to distinguish truth from falsehood, to separate fact from propaganda. They will have to understand that many of the things they have been taught are not true. Then they will have to seek out the facts for themselves, before they can hope to make sound decisions.

The New World Order has been based on lies and distortion, which must be completely debunked. First on the debunk list should be the Federal Reserve System. The Federal Reserve System is not owned by the government. The government doesn’t own a dime’s worth of stock in it. It is owned by private individuals, mostly by those who own and control the great banking and investment houses in New York City.

Congress does not coin the money and regulate its value. The privately owned Federal Reserve System issues all the money; they create the money and get it into circulation by buying debt bonds of the Federal Government. The government puts the money into circulation when they use these Federal Reserve Notes to pay the government bills. The green paper in the pockets of Americans is plainly marked; it tells its own story; it is a FEDERAL RESERVE NOTE.

The government in Washington is not a National Government. Under the New World Order, it is the government of a State in the World Government of the United Nations. This fact is accepted in a hazy sort of fashion by the student of today. His parents have never suspected it, nor would they have cared much if they had. Collectively they have long since decided to let their children work out the problems created by their own insensate desires for the unearned good things of life, here and now. The fact that the children were not being equipped to handle these problems was of no consequence to their parents. Not until the draft board takes its toll, do these parents sense danger.

It is the opinion of this writer that a factual review of the past is imperative if the youth of today is to understand the present and be prepared to assess properly the strangest and most colossal wreckage in all history, a sea of wreckage represented by split-level homes, gaudy new cars and boats, fabulous luxuries of every description,—all mortgaged to the hilt and charged to the new generation.

Inquiring and rebellious youth must understand that all this did not happen without central planning and direction. He should understand also that those who planned and directed this program, which has brought perpetual war to a most peacefully inclined people, had something to gain from the adventure. He must realize that in all history there have been greedy and power-mad men who have schemed to rule the world. He should know who these men are and how they operate.

Revolution, as the average American understands the term, is a violent overthrow of existing government. The International Bankers of the Council on Foreign Relations could not hope to accomplish their purpose by such tactics, nor are they the type to engage in such perilous activity. The new revolution had to be fought with money. They would provide the money for revolution, for wars, for the wholesale bribery of the whole populace in the forms of welfare, subsidies, wage and price guarantees, social security and a host of other benefits all charged to the beneficiaries in the public debt. This debt is owed largely to these International Bankers of the Council on Foreign Relations.

In order to sustain the profound and peaceful operation of the new government, the visible form of that government must be maintained. The People will go along producing at peak capacity to support the schemes of what they believe to be their government, hence, the President, the Congress and the Supreme Court will remain in Washington and go through the motions of that government. The revolutionary government works through the United Nations, where the laws are actually made and handed down to the straw-bosses of the Member State, the President, Congress and Supreme Court for implementation. All are charged with the binding obligation of putting these laws into effect within their borders. This they do, and they are continuing to do, wittingly or unwittingly (members of Congress appear to do their part unwittingly) since we were taken into the United Nations.

The more observing youth will remember the Republican National Convention of 1964, where young Republicans rose up and ousted the former leaders of their Party. These leaders were denounced by the delegates who referred to them as the Establishment or the Eastern Establishment. The propaganda press went all-out to protect the Establishment without giving any information on the nature and make-up of this organization. The fact is that the top echelon of The Establishment is occupied by the bankers of the Federal Reserve System and a group of associated cartelists who intend to rule the World through the United Nations.

This group of billionaires and their trained agents, who occupy all top posts in the Washington government by appointment of the Establishment, are incorporated under the title, Council on Foreign Relations. It is an international combine, having counterpart organizations throughout Europe, Asia and Africa. Through their Central Banking systems, they control the wealth of the world and use this wealth and the credit of all the people in the world to advance their own objective. One of their trusted member-agents put it thus: "Our goal is government of all the world." (Elmo Roper).

The Council on Foreign Relations was organized immediately after the failure of their League of Nations scheme. They took control of both political parties through the simple expedient of getting control of the delegates of the National Conventions by whatever means necessary. Money was never a problem to them. They had control of the Federal Reserve System; it was their property.

With firm control of both political parties, their control of government was secure. The Council on Foreign Relations headquarters in New York became both a training school and a hiring hall for operatives of the Washington government. This small group of 1400 men have literally taken over the government of the United States and eased it into the World Empire (The New World Order) of the United Nations.

The course of empire once again is littered with the dead and broken bodies of youth, the youth of the world this time. A war and debt economy on an international scale demands this; empire-building requires it. The death march goes on because American youth and their irresponsible parents are misinformed and completely misled by the propaganda of those who will destroy anything which stands in the way of their planned World Conquest.

One of the most loquacious members of the Council on Foreign Relations stood before a Committee of the United States Senate, not many years ago, and told the Senators to their faces that they (we) would have world government whether we want it or not; if we did not get it by consent, said Mr. James P. Warburg, we would get it by conquest. The whole Senate has taken his word for it. We have gotten world government by consent.

A simple question should be posed for the inquiring American and it is imperative that the answer be found right now, in this time of crisis: Why should the richest men in the United States favor World Government? It cannot be denied that they favor it and are using their vast wealth and influence to advance this objective. On Wednesday, November 10th, 1965 the New York Metropolitan Committee of the United World Federalists held their Second Annual "Publius Award" Dinner. On the dais were:

Mr. Clark M. Eichelberger

Honorable Benjamin V. Cohen Dr. Arthur Larson

Honorable Paul G. Hoffman

Mr. Charles Rhyne

Mr. William Rand, Jr.

Ambassador Zenon G. Rossides

Mr. C. Maxwell Stanley

His Excellency Chief S. O. Adebo,

Mr. John J. McCloy

Mr. Grenville Clark

Mr. Randolph P. Compton

Mr. Norman Cousins

Dr. Arthur N. Holcombe

Honorable Constance Baker Motley

Dr. Louis B. Sohn

Mr. C. V. Nararimhan

Mr. Thomas H. Mahony

Dean Andrew W. Cordier

Mr. James P. Warburg

Mr. Lloyd K. Garrison

President John Sloan Dickey

Honorable Thomas K. Finletter

Justice William O. Douglas

More than half of these men are members of the Council on Foreign Relations. They are among the richest men in the world. Would they be here unless the United World Federalists were promoting their interests? The reader will note the name of James P. Warburg on the list. It is he and his associates on the Council who have decreed that we will have world government whether we want it or not. The point to be stressed in this work is that we already have it. There are now two questions confronting us: Do we want it? Must we keep it? Only an enlightened America is competent to answer. This little book is intended to provide an outline of the progress of World Empire, to show how it has been accomplished, who directed the operation and where we stand as a Member State.

The President of the United States has made the unequivocal statement that the United States had a revolution under the New Deal and that it was time now for a world revolution. He said the New Deal revolution had been profound but peaceful. That is why the people did not know about it and because the people did not know about it, an immediate change in the form of government was not expedient. The Constitutional form would remain; the President, the Congress, the Supreme Court, would continue to represent a visible government, while the new revolutionary government was established at a higher, invisible level.

This, then, is the story of the PROFOUND REVOLUTION.


Preface

It has often been said that truth is stranger than fiction. So it is that the truth of the political status of the United States, from 1945 to the present time, is so monstrous as to appear incredible.

The enemy group within our country, who have betrayed the people and robbed them of their former sovereignty, are keen students of human nature. They have taken full advantage of the blind trust which Americans place in their leaders and so-called representatives. They even capitalize upon the pathetic refusal of the people to believe it possible that these leaders have illegally changed their form of government behind their backs, without their knowledge or consent. The hideous farce is perpetuated by the continuing employment of the big lie technique, through an almost absolute control of the fields of communication and education. The overwhelming majority of the people have been so cleverly brainwashed that they actually believe the real traitors to be those who are trying to tell them the truth.

However incredible it may seem, the facts are that the United Nations Organization is a world government, that its Charter is the Constitution creating it, that the United States has been a member of this world government since its creation in 1945 and that our joinder therein was actually a bloodless revolution which caused the loss of our sovereignty and which illegally changed our form of government, in violation and abandonment of the United States Constitution, the Constitutions of the respective States and the inalienable rights of the people.

Since all of the aims and purposes of this book are based upon those premises, it is of fundamental importance to first establish their truth.

Is the United Nations Charter a Constitution for world government or is it merely a treaty? It is true that America's agreement to it and participation in it was effected in the manner of a treaty, as prescribed by the Constitution of the United States, by being signed by President Harry S. Truman with the advice and consent of the United States Senate. Article VI of the United States Constitution provides that the Constitution and the laws of the United States which shall be made in pursuance thereof and all treaties made or which shall be made under the authority of the United States, shall be the supreme law of the land and that the judges in every State shall be bound thereby, anything in the Constitution and laws of any State to the contrary notwithstanding.

It will thus be seen that in effecting the United Nations Charter as a treaty it was given a prima facie status of being the supreme law of the land.

We have had it repeatedly dinned into our ears that the document is a treaty. The blanket acceptance of that statement is almost universal. In this case, the big lie technique was so imminently successful, that it apparently did not even occur to anyone to question it until 1961, when the statement was categorically disputed for the first time by attorney Arthur J. J. Bohn of Fort Lauderdale, Florida, in the form of a letter to the respective state Governors, which has since become known as the Bohn Plan. Briefly, said letter contended that the United Nations Charter was in fact a Constitution for world government and not a treaty, that whatever it was called, it had changed our form of government and had caused the loss of our sovereignty, that our joinder in it was illegal and void from the start because it was in violation of the United States Constitution. The letter further requested that one of the States join with one citizen in filing a suit directly in the Supreme Court of the United States to challenge the constitutionality of the United Nations Charter and to force our withdrawal from that organization. The authority to file such a suit directly in the highest tribunal is found in Article III, Section 2, of our Constitution, which provides:

"2. In all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, and those in which a State shall be a party, the Supreme Court shall have original jurisdiction. . ."

Let us proceed to more particularly explore the facts supporting this tenet.

First of all, the word "Charter" is synonymous with the word "Constitution." I am sure that many of the readers themselves participated in the drafting of Constitutions for clubs, societies and organizations, where the ultimate document was actually called a Charter. In this instance, we are concerned with a formal, written, instrument which calls itself "Charter of the United Nations." The document, therefore, speaks for itself to the effect that it is a charter, rather than a treaty. There is no language in the body of the instrument which even indirectly implies that it is a treaty. As a matter of fact, the provisions of Article 102 of the United Nations Charter specifically demonstrate that the Charter distinguishes itself from a treaty, to-wit-

"1. Every treaty and every international agreement entered into by any member of the United Nations after the present Charter comes into force, shall as soon as possible be registered with the Secretariat and published by it.

2. No party to any such treaty or international agreement which has not been registered in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 1 of this Article may invoke that treaty or agreement before any organ of the United Nations."

If the Charter itself was regarded as a treaty, it is obvious how completely nonsensical the above Article would be. It is equally self-evident from this Article that the framers of the Charter clearly intended that mere treaties and international agreements were completely distinct from and subservient to the provisions of the Charter.

Aside from this, I think it will be conceded generally that people create governments by constitutions, whereas governments create treaties by agreement. Your own dictionary will prove that the main purpose of a constitution is to create an organization and that a constitution is a written instrument creating and embodying the fundamental organic law or principles of government of a Nation, state, society or other organized body of men. On the other hand, the same source will demonstrate that a treaty is a formal, written agreement or contract between two or more already existing sovereign powers or states, customarily relating to some specific subject matter, such as a Treaty of Alliance or a Treaty of Peace. At this point, let me ask, could the member nations enter into any agreement with the United Nations until the United Nations Organization was first created? No one can enter into a contract with a non-existent entity.

Tested by these axiomatic, dictionary definitions, furthermore, the express language of the Preamble of the United Nations Charter reveals that the document is, in fact and in law, a Constitution for world government. Stripped of its deliberately confusing verbiage, it reads as follows:

"CHARTER OF THE UNITED NATIONS

We, the peoples of the United Nations... have agreed to the present Charter of the United Nations and do hereby establish an international organization to be known as the United Nations."

That language is so simple and clear that even a child should be able to understand it. Perhaps that is why the children are not taught to read this document, since otherwise they might quickly learn how their fathers had sold them into slavery.

It is enough to say that the balance of the lengthy preamble, which outlines its reasons for creating the world government, is sandwiched between the subject of the sentence and its verbs, to the extent that by the time the average reader reaches the verbs and their object, he will likely have forgotten who was said to be doing the creating of the international organization, namely, "We, the peoples of the United Nations… "

If there is any doubt left in anyone's mind concerning the fact that the United Nations Charter is a Constitution establishing a world government, let him compare the preamble of the Charter with the preamble of the United States Constitution, which reads:

"CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES

We, the people of the United States ... do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America."

The significant difference, of course, was that when the people formed and created the government of the United States, the people really did it, with their full knowledge and consent, through their own elected representatives, assembled in open, constitutional assembly, whereas when the "peoples of the United Nations" allegedly formed the world government of the United Nations, it was done for them, behind their backs, without their knowledge and consent, by such notorious characters as Alger Hiss, who was Secretary General of the United Nations Conference and a member of the so-called American delegation at San Francisco in 1945, where and when this monster was spawned. The preamble of the United Nations Charter also says that the "peoples" involved were represented "through representatives assembled in the city of San Francisco who have exhibited their full powers, found to be in good and due form . . ."

I will ask, just rhetorically, do any of the readers remember ever having empowered Alger Hiss or anyone else to scrap the United States Constitution and sell them down the river into world government?

The perpetrators of this monstrosity and their ant-like retinue of "intellectual" supporters and successors, in addition to promoting the big lie that the United Nations Charter is merely a treaty, have also saturated, the field of communications with an even bigger lie, to the effect that a treaty may violate and even supersede the Constitution of the United States. The late John Foster Dulles was one of the most vocal exponents of this bigger lie, even during his tenure as our Secretary of State. Is it any wonder, then, that the people are confused?

The real truth of the matter is that a treaty must conform to the provisions of the United States Constitution. If it violates the Constitution, it is illegal and void and unenforceable. A treaty has no greater dignity than a simple law of Congress, which must conform to the Constitution. In fact, if a law of Congress conflicts with the provisions of an earlier treaty, the law of Congress voids and supersedes the treaty to the extent of the conflict.

There is nothing which can supersede the United States Constitution, excepting only an amendment to it, executed in the formal manner prescribed in its own Article V. Nothing of that nature was even attempted at San Francisco in 1945.

It is hoped that the reader will be shocked to learn that the above statement of the law is not just the writer's opinion, but a solemn judicial pronouncement of the Supreme Court of the United States, in 1957, under the Chief Justiceship of Hon. Earl Warren, in the case of Reid v. Covert (S.C.U.S.-1957) 354 U. S. 1, L Ed. (2nd) 1163, 77 S. Ct. 1222, 1231, wherein the court said:

"Even though a court martial does not give an accused trial by jury and other Bill of Rights protections, the Government contends that Article 2 (11) of U.C.M.J., insofar as it provides for the military trial of dependents accompanying the armed forces in Great Britain and Japan, can be sustained as legislation which is necessary and proper to carry out the United States' obligations under the international agreements made with those countries. The obvious and decisive answer to this, of course, is that no agreement with a foreign nation can confer power on the Congress, or on any other branch of the government, which is free from the restraints of the Constitution."

Article VI, the Supremacy Clause of the Constitution declares:

"This Constitution, and the Laws of the United States which shall be made in pursuance thereof; and all Treaties made, or which shall be made, under the Authority of the United States, shall be the Supreme Law of the Land…"

There is nothing in this language which intimates that treaties and laws enacted pursuant to them do not have to comply with the provisions of the Constitution. Nor is there anything in the debates which accompanied the drafting and ratification of the Constitution which even suggests such a result. These debates as well as the history that surrounds the adoption of the treaty provision in Article VI make it clear that the reason treaties were not limited to those made in "pursuance" of the Constitution was so that agreements made by the United States under the Articles of Confederation, including the important peace treaties which concluded the Revolutionary War would remain in effect. It would be manifestly contrary to the objectives of those who created the Constitution, as well as those who were responsible for the Bill of Rights—let alone alien to our entire Constitutional history and tradition—to construe Article VI as permitting the United States to exercise power under an international agreement without observing constitutional prohibitions (footnote 32 - See the discussions in the Virginia Convention of the adoption of the Constitution. 3 Elliott's Debates. (1836 ed.) 5000-519. In effect, such construction would permit amendment of that document in a manner not sanctioned by Article V. The prohibitions of the Constitution were designed to apply to all branches of the National Government and they cannot be nullified by the Executive and the Senate combined.

There is nothing new or unique about what we say here. This Court has regularly and uniformly recognized the Supremacy of the Constitution over a treaty. (Footnote 33. E.g. U.S. v. State of Minnesota, 270 U.S. 181. 207-8, 46 S. Ct. 298, 303-306, 70 L. Ed,. 539. Holden v. Jay 17 Wall. 211, 242-243, 21 L. Ed. 523: The Cherokee Tobacco 11 Wall 616, 670 621, 20 L. Ed. 227; Doe ex den. Clark v. Braden, I6 How. 635. 657, 14 L. Ed. 1090, cf. Marbury v. Madison, 1 Cranch 137. 176-180, 2 L. Ed. 60. We recognize that executive agreements are involved here, but it cannot be contended that such an agreement rises to greater stature than a treaty).

For example, in Geofrey v. Riggs T33 U.S. 258, 267, 10 S. Ct. 295, 297, 33 L. Ed. 642, it declared:

" ‘The treaty power, as expressed in the Constitution, is in terms unlimited except by those restraints which are found in that instrument against the action of the government or of its departments, and those arising from the nature of the government itself and of that of the States. It would not be contended that it extends so far as to authorize what the Constitution forbids, or a change in the character of the government or in that of one of the States, or a session of any portion of the latter, without its consent'."

This Court has also repeatedly taken the position that an Act of Congress, which must comply with the Constitution, is on a full parity with a treaty, and that when a statute, which is subsequent in time, is inconsistent with a treaty, the statute to the extent of conflict renders the treaty null. It would be completely anomalous to say that a treaty need not comply with the Constitution when such an agreement can be overridden by a Statute that must conform to that instrument.

There is nothing in State of Missouri v. Holland, 252 US. 416. 40 S. Ct. 182, 64 L. Ed. 941, which is contrary to the position taken here. There the Court carefully noted that the treaty involved was not inconsistent with any specific provision of the Constitution. The Court was concerned with the Tenth Amendment which reserves to the States or the people all power not delegated to the National Government. To the extent that the United States can validly make treaties, the people and the States have delegated their power to the National Government and the Tenth Amendment is no barrier.

In summary, we conclude that the Constitution in its entirety applied to the trials of Mrs. Smith and Mrs. Covert.

At this point, it might intelligently be asked why we are still operating under the United Nations Charter if it is so clearly illegal and void. The answer is insidiously simple. Under the principles of American law, the Charter, which as you will recall, was approved as a treaty, is presumed to be valid, until such time as it is declared invalid by a Court of competent jurisdiction. The Courts, themselves, cannot raise the question on their own initiative. The question of invalidity must be raised by some litigant in an actual, litigated case, called a justifiable controversy. The main thrust of the Bohn Plan, to which we referred earlier, was to have one of the States bring such a case directly before the Supreme Court. In view of the law as outlined in the above case of Reid v. Covert, the result of such a case should be inevitable to force our withdrawal from the illegal world government apparatus.

Why, then, has no State come forward to file such a suit? Why, moreover, has the Congress of the United States not passed a law simply voiding the alleged "Treaty"? Why, then, have the Presidents and Senate members since 1945 not acted to cancel the unconstitutional and revolutionary action which their predecessors took? There can be only one answer to these questions. Those in control of the federal agencies of the government must be dedicated world socialists, desirous of perpetuating the illegally established world government and desirous of confirming forever the destruction of the former Constitutional, Republican form of government of the United States. As to those in control of the State Agencies, there are many who have a similar ambition and identity of interest and there are undoubtedly others who simply do not have the courage to try to fight the world power, knowing that there would be immediate reprisal in the form of withdrawal of all federal handouts, sabotage of their political careers and the targeting of their States for intensive, military controls.

It might then be asked, why some individual does not start a suit to restore our Constitution and to force our withdrawal from the United Nations. The answer again is quite clear. Such a suit, absent the joinder of a State, would have to be filed in the lowest state or federal tribunal and laboriously appealed. It would be subjected to a thousand delays and legal, procedural snarls and pitfalls and very likely never even reach the Supreme Court of the United States. Even the cost of such an effort would be a roadblock to individual action.

You might finally ask. What proof is there that the provisions of the United Nations Charter established a world government? Well, we must first suggest that you read the document and judge for yourself. You will find that it assumes territorial sovereignty over the entire universe. It has established a capital in New York City. It has established a World Court and judicial system, a world legislative body and a world executive department. Through regional agencies, regional agreements, covenants, resolutions, executive agreements and conventions, it has assumed control over every field of life of which the mind can conceive and last, but certainly not least, in the so-called interest of peace and security, it has provided for its own absolute military control of the entire universe. As an example of the exercise of this power in our current history, it has involved the United States in a war with Viet Nam, without the necessity of a declaration of war by the United States Congress. This should be enough to satisfy any reasonable mind that we are not operating under the Constitution of the United States.

Incredible? Yes, but true. In this late hour, as you read on, just remember that it is only the Truth Who can set you free.


CHAPTER ONE

The World Constitution

A study of the United Nations Charter is a difficult but completely absorbing task. It contains the most amazing provisions, some of them so fantastic that the student must wonder what manner of men sat in the United States Senate in 1945 when this document was ratified. The admitted fact that the members of the Senate were not provided with copies of the lethal document they were considering may have been responsible for the obvious failure of the Senate to know what they were doing. Of course, the propaganda barrage which had drenched the nation for months was still in full cry. It would have been very bad politics indeed to have refused to ratify the Charter,—the "Last Great Hope for Mankind."

The Senate considered the Charter for only four days, while the Civil Rights Bill of 1964, spawned by the Charter, occupied the Congress for nearly six months. This might be said to shed a little light on a situation now exposed and resembling a dead mackerel in the moonlight.

What, for instance, was in the minds of Senators who ratified Article 25 of the Charter?

ARTICLE 25: "Member nations agree to accept and carry out the decisions of the Security Council in accordance with the present Charter."

That is all there is of Article 25. No conditions---no reservations, WE just agree to accept and carry out the decisions of the Security Council no matter what they are. The business about the "PRESENT CHARTER" must be noted. It indicates that somebody had in mind other Charters to come later. However, the record is clear that, the UNers had no intention, from the very beginning, of being bound by the "Present Charter."

This Charter provided that there would be a VETO in the Security Council. The Congressman of today assures the people that the Senate of 1945 would never have ratified the Charter without the protection of American interests, guaranteed (?) by the VETO. There was not much protection here either, as we shall see, as the United States Delegates, by the terms of their oaths of office, are sworn to represent the interests of the United NATIONS only. They would veto ONLY when the best interests of the U. N. required it.

The busy beavers of the U. N. left nothing to chance. They had to get rid of the veto or get around it and this they did. Accordingly, in 1950, Mr. John Foster Dulles appeared before the General Assembly with a thing which he dubbed the "Uniting for Peace" Resolution. It had nothing to do with "uniting" and even less to do with "peace". It was a scheme to permit the General Assembly to order military actions,—to by-pass the Security Council and the veto. This resolution was adopted by the General Assembly and effectively put an end to the "present Charter" of 1945.

This fact has been recognized by the government in Washington and by the World Government of the United Nations. Under the Charter, the U. N. was required by Article 109 to review and revise or amend the Charter on the tenth year (1955) if it had not been amended before that time. Consequently, in 1954 the U. N. sent to the Senate a list of proposed Charter amendments.

This list was assigned to a special sub-committee of the Senate for study and recommendation and the subcommittee report was as follows:

Staff Study No. 2 for the Sub-Committee on the United Nations Charter of the Committee on Foreign Relations, U. S. Senate, 83rd Congress. 2nd Session, 1954:

"We are by no means examining the charter that was drafted in San Francisco in 1945. We are examining the charter of 1954 as it had, been amplified by custom and usage, resolutions of the various UN organs and treaties, like the Atlantic Pact which are consistent with the charter and have a heavy impact on the U. N. system.

"If we should proceed now to consider amendments to the old charter rather than the new, it would be very much like a surgeon planning a major operation on the basis of a diagnosis made 9 years ago."

There you have it. At the end of nine years the Charter was found to have [been] violated out of business by the U. N. itself. There was not enough left, of the Charter, ratified by the United States Senate, to amend. The U. N. and the Washington Government still recognized the binding properties of Article 109. Each year Article 109 is on the agenda and each year the obligation to review and amend the charter is "postponed."

In adopting the Charter of the United Nations as a TREATY, the United States Senate had elevated the Charter of the U. N. to a position where it superseded the Constitution of the United States. There is a loophole in the Constitution of the United States,—Article 6, Paragraph 2, which asserts:

"The Constitution and the laws of the United States which shall be made in pursuance thereof, and all treaties made or which shall be made, under the authority of the United States, shall be the supreme law of the land, and the judges in every state shall be bound thereby, anything in the Constitution of laws of any State to the contrary notwithstanding."

It is not for us to argue that this Article does not mean what it says.

Now here we find a sub-committee of the United States Senate reporting to the Foreign Relations Committee of the Senate that this Charter, which the Senate had ratified, had been abolished by the activities of the United Nations and its staff. Why did not the Senate, right then and there, begin a REVIEW of the Charter and the subsequent actions which had wiped it out of existence? Why have they failed and refused to REVIEW it to this day?

To any close observer of the situation prevailing in Washington, where the United Nations is in question, it is evident that the whole Congress lives in TERROR of any involvement in United Nations affairs. Men who will stand up to anything else pertaining to the national welfare, cringe and run from any discussion of the United Nations. The sons of their States have died in U. N. wars and continue to die, with no relief in sight. Congress still refuses to question the U. N.— the outlaw organization operating outside its lawful Charter almost from its inception.

The position of, official Washington, with regard to this TREATY and the thousands of other TREATIES ratified under the U. N. auspices, is well stated by John Foster Dulles, then Secretary of State and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, before a regional meeting of the American Bar Association at Louisville, Kentucky, April 12, 1952:

"The treaty-making power is an extraordinary power liable to abuse. Treaties make international law and they also make domestic law. Under our Constitution, treaties become the supreme law of the land. They are indeed more supreme than ordinary laws, for Congressional laws are invalid if they do not conform. to the Constitution, whereas treaty law can override the Constitution. Treaties, for example, can take powers away from the Congress and give them to the President; they can take powers from the States and give them to the Federal Government or to some international body and they can cut across rights given to the people by their Constitutional Bill of Rights."

It matters not whether we agree with this statement of the former Secretary of State. The whole Federal Government has accepted it and are operating under this concept.

The Charter of the United Nations was not, by any means, the end of the U. N. treaty-making operation. Long before the San Francisco Conference the UNers had been engaged in forming corporations with charters of most dubious legality. When the Senate adopted the United, Nations charter as a treaty, the doors were opened for a flood of treaties. The charters of the subversive organizations, many of which became "Specialized Agencies" of the United Nations were, one by one, sent to the Senate for ratification. Adopted as treaties, they all became Law of the Land.

There were a few Senators at the time who had agreed to meet at odd hours, usually while the other members were at dinner, and ratify these treaties by votes of one or several Senators. This was possible due to another loop-hole in the Constitution (Article 2, Section 2) which enables the Senate by vote of two of the members PRESENT, to ratify a treaty. This treaty making by a few Senators continued until several thousand such treaties had been ratified. Then a full two-thirds of the Members of the Senate joined in a resolution to amend the Constitution (the Bricker Amendment) to put a stop to such treaty making.

The President and his whole Administration opposed the Bricker Amendment and brought such pressure to bear on the members of the Senate that the resolution was defeated by a single vote. The President did, however, agree that there would be no more such treaty making, and perhaps there was none. There is more than one way to "skin a cat," and the UNers had some of the best skinners in the business. Law by resolution would replace treaty law and be much more effective. Resolution law would by-pass both Senate and veto.

The fact that the United Nations operators had no intention of abiding by any provisions of the Charter, unless it suited them to do so, is best illustrated in a speech delivered by the American Ambassador, Warren Austin, to the General Assembly at its very first meeting.

The reader is about to be introduced to the "semantics" of the United Nations and its official interpreters as they start right out to re-write the Charter by interpretation. Under the terms of the Charter ALL THE POWER was in the Security Council. The General Assembly was purely an advisory organ. This set-up was not exactly "Democratic" for only eleven nations would be represented on the Security Council at any one time. But whether "Democratic" or not, this was the UN Charter ratified by the United States Senate, and presumably binding on the United States and all other Member Nations and upon the United Nations itself.


CHAPTER TWO

Truth Crushed To Earth

The President pronounced, on December 17th, 1963, before the General Assembly of the United Nations that the nation had been through a revolution, a "profound but peaceful revolution," he said. This observation received the usual silent treatment from the press.

This long-delayed and official pronouncement deserves more than passing notice. A gradually awakening public is becoming aware that there is something seriously wrong in Washington. Young men of draft age and their parents are just beginning to realize that we are in a continual state of war, with troops stationed all over the world. Few can remember that prior to our involvement in the United Nations we had NO DRAFT except in time of war. Now, of course, we have the "cold war" which goes on pointlessly and endlessly. The end result is the same--death and destruction.

Fat paychecks and lush dividend checks have kept America happy. We could not be bothered with conditions which sent other men's sons to the ends of the earth. Now the wars have become "hot" wars and the draft is coming closer to home. As a Nation, we are worried. We do not understand and nobody will enlighten us.

The President has given us a hint. We should realize that a successful revolution ALWAYS brings about a CHANGE IN THE FORM OF GOVERNMENT. We did not recognize this revolution because it was "peaceful" and so we have not noticed the change in the form of government. According to the President, the revolution took place in the days of the Franklin Roosevelt regime. The new government then was identified as the New Deal. The revolution was accomplished under the direction of a strange coterie known as the Brain Trust; it went off without a hitch.

The peaceful and profound revolution produced a government by deep and devious individuals, whose criminal ruthlessness was not to come to light for nearly a quarter of a century. Their first bold stroke was to enter into a conspiracy with the War Lords of Japan to sink our own Fleet in Pearl Harbor.

Nothing in the history of civilized man can equal the INFAMY of the very top echelon of the new government. The President, the Secretary of State, the Secretary of War, Secretary of the Navy, Chief of Naval Operations and other lesser lights in the Administration, fully informed of the coming attack on Pearl Harbor, deliberately sat for days, awaiting the blow and concealing the information from the Commanders at Pearl Harbor.

Victims of Establishment propaganda will denounce this statement as subversive or worse. The record is clear; it is indisputable. The best writers and historians of the period have revealed and documented the facts and their works have been banished through the silent treatment accorded them by the same press which conceals the facts about Viet-Nam today.

The Japanese code had been broken months before Pearl Harbor day. The President and high-ranking officials of the United States Navy knew the day and the hour selected for the attack. They refused to notify the Commanders at Pearl Harbor for the simple reason that they WANTED this attack in order to get into the war against Germany. They were following the British suggestion that America might come in "through the back door of Japan."

Several thousand young Americans lost their lives in that treacherous action. Immediately the President took to the air-waves denouncing the Japs and the Day of Infamy. He also suggested to the American public that the murdered men were largely to blame. He intimated, without a shred of evidence, that these victims of his own treachery had been carousing the night before and were unable to meet their obligations on the fatal morning. TRUTH was crushed to earth on Pearl Harbor day. It will rise only when the facts are revealed and accepted by the American people.

Many excellent and well-documented books have been written establishing beyond question that the sinking of our fleet in Pearl Harbor was planned by the revolutionary government in Washington—although the orders probably came from Council on Foreign Relations headquarters in New York. The guiding hand in the whole scheme was that of Henry L. Stimson who BOASTS of his part in the disaster in his Diary. Stimson, who was Secretary of War, together with Secretary of the Navy, Frank Knox, and Chief of Naval Operations, Admiral Stark were all member agents of the Council on Foreign Relations.

The new revolutionary government in Washington was still without a SEAT OF GOVERNMENT for their rapidly building World Empire. They still clung to the belief that the plan they had followed at the time of World War I, i.e., the League of Nations, had merit, even though it failed when the Senate of the United States refused to accept it. They would have another war and another League of Nations.

The Plans for the new World Empire, which would expand enormously following World War II, required that the People be occupied with serious problems such as would accrue from a world war. Also the People had to be CONDITIONED to accept the new Constitution without question. By this time they would be so war weary they would accept anything sold to them in the name of PEACE.

The propaganda machines of the Establishment went into high gear as they set about selling the American public on the virtues of the United Nations. Any voice raised in warning was effectively stilled. The Constitution had been carefully drawn and was all ready to "spring" on an unsuspecting world and an uninformed Congress. This, too, went off without a hitch. At war's end the World Government of the Establishment had absorbed the territory of OUR OWN ALLIES in Eastern Europe and was later to absorb that of China. The revolutionary government of the United States had not only agreed to it,—they had engineered it. The new government was outdoing its Pearl Harbor performance.

On December 9th, 1950, the Chicago Times commented editorially-

"The members of the Council (on Foreign Relations —ed.) are persons of much more than average influence in the community. They have used the prestige of their wealth, their social position and their education have given them to lead their country toward bankruptcy and military debacle. They should look at their hands: there is blood on them."

Indeed there is: the blood of Pearl Harbor; the blood of millions of World War II dead; the blood of those who died in Korea; the blood of the Cubans; the blood shed in the Dominican Republic,—and now the blood of VietNam. And the voice of America is mute.

Before the "peaceful and profound" revolution, the United States was a peace-loving nation. Our people detested war and kept themselves free from its debilitating influence. We had been trapped into World War I and unitedly we vowed: NEVER AGAIN. How were Americans conditioned to accept the drastic change from normal peace and prosperity to a continuing war and its resultant economy?

The ground was prepared in 1913 when the Wilson Administration, under the domination of Edward M. House, who was later to become the prime factor in the organization of the Council on Foreign Relations, procured the enactment of the Federal Reserve Central Banking System. This system, which had provided the money to keep Europe continually at war for hundreds of years for the profit of the Bankers, was now to provide the financing which would keep the United States in a state of continual conflict.

In 1913 the Federal Income Tax (the 16th Amendment) was enacted also and served as another rich source for the financing of world wars. The most destructive of the changes in the Federal structure was the enactment of the 17th Amendment, which, in effect, ABOLISHED THE SENATE and gave us TWO HOUSES OF CONGRESS.

The 17th Amendment wrecked the Federal-State relationship and temporarily strengthened the Federal Government. The States no longer had representation in the Federal Government which was then laid wide open to the predatory operations of greedy, power-mad men who would move in to dominate the undisciplined agency and eventually take it over completely.

The control of our money and credit being firmly established, the Federal Reserve crowd moved confident1v toward their goal, "government of all the world," as C.F.R. Member-agent Elmo Roper proudly proclaimed. They began training and financing the revolutionary armies who would go into Russia and overthrow the Russian Government.

They tricked the United States into World War I to cover up their take-over in Russia and to consolidate the Soviet gains. They had hoped to establish the World Government under the League of Nations and having failed in that they organized their "management and labor" divisions into the Council on Foreign Relations. The C. F. R. was formed BEFORE THEY LEFT PARIS and the British counterpart, the Royal Institute of Foreign Affairs, was organized at the same time. World Government was off and running.

Following World War I, the government began to experiment with the idea of continuing war-time "prosperity" by producing vast quantities of materials to be given away to our former allies. The working people of the United States "prospered" as never before. They had never had experience with burdensome debt up to that time, but now they began to live luxuriously—to borrow money to buy over-priced stocks and to live it up generally.

This was truly a MANAGED ECONOMY. The People had tasted luxury and they would remember these days in good times and bad. Suddenly the plug was pulled. Nobody knew what had happened; they just woke up one morning and the bottom had fallen out of the stock market, the manufacturing plants were closed and finally the banks closed. Much later they learned that the Federal Reserve Banking crowd had shipped so much gold out of the country, most of it to Germany, that the money, forced out of circulation by Federal Reserve law, left insufficient currency to carry on trade in our own country. The way was thus paved for the "profound and peaceful" revolution.

Twelve years of ensuing Depression brought the People to their knees. They were ready for a revolution and, although they did not understand it, they co-operated with it as they sought to regain the high prosperity of the post-war era. They had been CONDITIONED for the coming revolution: they had been STARVED into it.

Another holocaust was coming up. The People, still striving for the good things of life and determined to have WAR PROSPERITY WITHOUT WAR, began to resist the propaganda and the enticements of the revolutionary government. They had witnessed the terrible tyranny of the Russian Government, which had been recognized by the new revolutionary government in Washington by "EXECUTIVE ORDER." The people did not understand this either and they did not approve it. They had no stomach for any sort of partnership with the Bolsheviks.

While millions of young men were dying in the wars of Soviet conquest, other men were becoming enormously rich on the profits of those wars. Still, nobody seriously raised the question of the CAUSE OF WARS. In time and as the propaganda for World Empire held sway, the propagandists began preaching the doctrine that poverty and ignorance were the cause of wars. To get rid of wars we had to get rid of poverty and ignorance WORLD-WIDE.

Common sense became one of the first casualties of the propaganda blitz. Men in all ages past had recognized that it was the Richest Men in the warring nations who had CAUSED THE WARS, that wars were caused by greed and lust for power. Poor and illiterate men could not possibly launch major wars. It has always been the poor and illiterate who suffered most from them.

Now that we were preparing for the launching of the World Empire, it had become necessary to educate the world's illiterate in order to use them in the great industrial projects of the new World Empire. The whole world was to be put into production and the Constitution of this World Empire would provide that the People of the United States would bear the brunt of the financial burden. They could not have been persuaded to go along with this if they had known it, but the propaganda media could and did sell them this bill of goods on humanitarian grounds. Somehow wars would end if all the people in the world were made rich and literate. Everybody can agree that to end war the cause must be eliminated. The problem is to find out for certain just what that cause is.

The nation, drenched in propaganda largely through the public school system, has accepted the story that wars are caused by poverty and ignorance, that only through the elimination of poverty and ignorance worldwide will there be "peace and security." TRUTH has taken a terrible beating in this area. Reason has fled precipitously.

One thing is certain, war has not been eliminated by the new government nor by the World Government of the United Nations. It will not be until every nation has been subdued and brought into the World Empire. The new World Empire Government has its Constitution and is "in business" in a large way all over the world. It is time now to find out just WHO runs this government and HOW and WHY.

The United Nations is the direct successor to the League of Nations and was spawned by the same people or their direct antecedents. The Russian-born Leo Pasvolsky, a member-agent of the Council on Foreign Relations, was the foremost author of both the Covenant of the League of Nations and the Charter of the United Nations. He had been around in World Empire circles for a long time before his crimes caught up with him. He was an intimate associate of Alger Hiss and they collaborated closely in the preparation of the Charter. Hiss went on to become Secretary-General of the San Francisco Conference which adopted the Charter of the United Nations.

The finishing touches had been given to the Charter at the Yalta Conference just five months before the Conference at San Francisco. Hiss had been a prominent figure in the Yalta caper where Russia had been granted three votes in the General Assembly while all other nations, including the United States, were limited to one. From this Yalta Conference came the conspirators who had arranged the surrender of OUR OWN ALLIES in Eastern Europe to the Soviet branch of the World Empire. East Germany was delivered and Poland betrayed to the Soviet. The agreement was made on reparations to be collected by Russia from West Germany in the form of factories, locomotives and other machinery and equipment—BILLIONS of dollars worth of it—and a secret protocol which permitted the enslavement of German prisoners in Russian labor camps.

With this record directly behind them the representatives of the "peace-loving" countries (including Russia with her three votes) came, with pious mein, to the Peace Conference. Ten million Poles and another ten million Germans had been rendered homeless and sent streaming hopelessly down the roads to misery and death while their betrayers met for the purpose of creating a UNITED Nations—the great and abiding Hope of the World.

Secretary of State, Stettinius, had been in attendance at both the Yalta and San Francisco Conferences in his official capacity. Both times he was accompanied by and under the scrutiny of three master-minds from the Council on Foreign Relations who were also State Department "experts": H. Freeman Matthews, Alger Hiss and Wilder Foote. The young, handsome and vigorous Secretary of State, it might be mentioned, did not long survive the United Nations Conference in San Francisco. He had been a member agent of the Council on Foreign Relations, as have been later Secretaries of State Acheson, Dulles, Herter and Rusk. Dulles and Herter had also been members of The Inquiry, which was responsible for the planning of the League of Nations.

When the Government of the United States finally became involved in the United Nations officially, the President appointed five men to draw up the original draft of the Charter. These men were: Sumner Welles, Chairman of the Committee, Isaiah Bowman, Hamilton Fish Armstrong, Benjamin Cohen and Clark Eichelberger, all advocates of World Government and all members of the Council on Foreign Relations. To advise and assist this Committee, the Council sent down two member "experts"—Alger Hiss and Leo Pasvolsky. Thus the first seven men OFFICIALLY identified with the United Nations were ALL members of the Council on Foreign Relations.


CHAPTER THREE

Empire Building

Now we begin to get into the REAL purpose of the United Nations—the building of a World Empire. The United Nations masterminds hold that, in adopting the charter, all signatory members conferred upon the United Nations a MANDATE to re-build the world and to see that everybody in the world had a good living. They were to accomplish these things in any way they could get it done,—as the United Nations Participation Act so eloquently expresses it,—"Notwithstanding the provision of any other law."

By U. N. interpretation, the meat of the charter rests in Articles 55 and 56. Here, by U. N. reasoning, the Member Nations have delegated the authority, in fact a MANDATE, to them to re-build the world. Article 55:

"With a view to the creation of conditions of stability and well-being which are necessary for peaceful and friendly relations among nations based on respect for the principle of equal rights and self-determination of peoples, the United Nations SHALL PROMOTE:

Higher standards of living, FULL EMPLOYMENT and conditions of economic and social progress and DEVELOPMENT:

SOLUTIONS OF ECONOMIC, SOCIAL, HEALTH and related problems and international cultural and educational cooperation, and Universal respect for and observance of human rights and fundamental freedoms FOR ALL without distinction as to race, sex, language or religion."

Concealed in this hazy and innocuous language are stated the REAL purposes of the United Nations. The MANDATE to the U. N. to re-build the world is here and Member Nations have re-stated the authority and pledged full support and cooperation in Article 56:

"All Members pledge themselves to take joint and separate action in cooperation with the Organization for the achievement of the purposes set forth in Article 55."

Now, to get back to the General Assembly address of Ambassador Warren Austin, wherein he INTERPRETS another Article of the Charter, Article 1, Par. 4, keeping in mind that the General Assembly has NO POWER under the Charter:

"The General Assembly will, we feel, explore new fields of activity as time goes on and as new fields and functions, WHICH MAY NOT BE SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED FOR in the Charter, but which are NOT PRECLUDED by the Charter are entrusted to it. . . .

"These possibilities will be realized to the extent that the General Assembly exercises its VERY BROAD powers in strict accordance with the fundamental purposes of the United Nations as set forth in Article 1, Paragraph 4, to be a center for harmonizing the actions of the nations in the attainment of these common ends."

This interpretation is certainly a new twist in legal reckoning. The Constitution of the United States provides that all powers not specifically delegated to the Federal Government are retained by the States and by the People. The Charter provisions, by Mr. Austin's interpretation, are the reverse. All powers not delegated to the General Assembly, but NOT PROHIBITED to it by the Charter, are automatically legal and proper powers to be exercised by the General Assembly.

The ONLY power specifically denied the General Assembly by the Charter is that of interfering with the Security Council when it is functioning. Beyond this then, the General Assembly claims the authority to do anything it wishes and to bind all Member Nations by its decrees.

In order to operate under this theory of law, however, something had to be done to get around the veto. The "Uniting for Peace" resolution took care of that and now the General Assembly asserts powers far greater than those conferred upon the Security Council under the Charter. Article 25 should now read:

"Member nations agree to accept and carry out the decisions of the Security Council and the General Assembly." Period.


CHAPTER FOUR

Government By Resolution

The UNers are an accommodating lot. When the President said there would be no more "Senators Present" treaty making, their attitude was one of meek compliance. They abandoned treaty making as a general policy and promptly adopted the resolution method of making law. Under the Warren Austin interpretation and the "Uniting for Peace" resolution, a General Assembly resolution became law of the World. A simple resolution of the General Assembly ratified by vote of two-thirds of the Assembly is now recognized as World Law to be put into effect within the borders of each Member State.

It is an incredible fact that when the General Assembly adopts a resolution on ANY SUBJECT under the sun, that resolution becomes law throughout the world. The resolution is sent down to the heads of state of the member nations and they are obliged to implement it. If they fail to do so, the United Nations is empowered to do it for them, or to penalize them.

At this point we are having some very strange and UNconstitutional laws forced upon us. Never have we known anything like them. There is no authority VISIBLE to us to permit enactment of such laws or Court decisions upholding them. General Assembly resolution No. 1904 dealing with race and discrimination is an excellent example. And an earlier Civil Rights decision of the Supreme Court based upon a BOOK allegedly written by one Gunnar Myrdal, a Swedish Socialist who knew nothing about the Negro problem in the United States, is another.

The whole destructive race revolution has resulted from resolutions of the General Assembly. The UNers hold that total and complete integration of the races world-wide, is made MANDATORY by the Charter. The words "racial equality" spell it all out, and heads of State are required to put this Charter commitment into effect within their borders.

It would be most difficult for the President of the United States to persuade Congress to pass such legislation in the face of a hostile public opinion and the long recognized prohibitions of the Constitution. Once the resolution has been sent to him for implementation he MUST get the job done. It matters not what he thinks about it, nor what Congress or Court may think; the resolution must be put into effect within the borders of the "nation-state." In a very touchy situation subterfuge may be needed. The UN will provide the necessary "con" artists to take care of that. In the matter of implementing the race and discrimination resolutions the President and the Supreme Court did need such help and the United Nations sent their TOP AGENT to take care of the matter.

Mr. Gunnar Myrdal was by no means the poor, broken-down Swedish author, struggling to make a dollar, pictured by the Nation's press. He had been one of the very top men in the United Nations from the very beginning. During the Trygvie Lie administration he had been regarded as second only to Mr. Lie. The matter of implementing the UNconstitutional race and discrimination resolutions was a job of TOP PRIORITY and the UN sent a top priority man to do it.

He was to write a book,—or get a "ghost" to write it for him. The Supreme Court would use the book as a peg on which to hang the up-coming decision. This operation was as smooth as are all UN sponsored operations. They always go off without hitch. Lawyers nation-wide were shocked at the thought of the Supreme Court basing an important decision on a book written by a foreigner. In time most lawyers came to regard this as the project of an incompetent and not overly bright Chief Justice.

General Assembly Resolution No. 1904 followed the Myrdal decision by several years. Parts of No. 1904 have already been implemented in the Civil Rights Acts of 1964 and 1965 which were closely followed by a wholesale increase in the salaries of Congressmen and Senators, a full $7,500 a year INCREASE. We will quote from No. 1904. You will note that a General Assembly Resolution does not advise or recommend; IT COMMANDS the head of State to REVISE and RESCIND laws and to PASS LEGISLATION and to do it IMMEDIATELY and effectively (and don't let us tell you again).

There is no longer any trace of sovereignty left in the Federal Government, nor does any man in Congress seriously claim there is. The Washington Government is completely under UN domination and DISCIPLINE and they all know it and conduct themselves accordingly. This is why they continue to appropriate fabulous and fantastic sums of tax money for projects all over the world, for the building of the UN World Empire.

Few people understand that "Foreign Aid" money is not, and never has been, spent for food, shelter, medication and other necessities for the people of the world. The so-called "Specialized Agencies" of the UN handle those matters. Foreign Aid money goes into the coffers of the various United Nation's EMPIRE BUILDING agencies. The Congress does not appropriate this money directly to the UN; they could not get away with that. There is an Agency of the Government known as the Agency for International Development (AID) which acts as a pipe-line between the Congress and the various UN agencies. The money is stuffed into this pipe-line by the Congress and it pours into the coffers of the UN agencies at the other end of the line.

Nor is this enough for the UNers. To get the rest of the picture we must fully understand that which very few Americans have been able to grasp, that the United States has agreed to COMPLETELY DISARM and to turn our whole military establishment over to the United Nations. This INSANE operation is well under way now and is to be completed by 1970. There will be no United States Army, Navy or Air Force. There will be just enough military machinery to keep the populace in subjection.

There is an immense incentive to the UN to get this accomplished as soon as possible. The UN has adopted, by UNANIMOUS VOTE of the General Assembly, an incredible resolution providing that when we disarm, we will turn the money, SAVED BY DISARMAMENT, over to the UN to finance empire building. This resolution was adopted on December 18th, 1962. The Defense Budget now approaches the 70 billion dollar a year figure. The spenders in the UN have been urged frequently to step up the spending in anticipation of the windfall which will result from the "total and complete disarmament" of the United States.

On November 20th, 1963, just two days before the assassination of President Kennedy, the General Assembly adopted Resoluton No. 1904. The late President had sent to the Congress a Civil Rights Bill which most Congressmen agree was far less severe than the one which replaced it after his death. The latter Bill was obviously the implementation of 1904. Some of the provisions of 1904 are quoted below:

Article 2: "Particular efforts shall be made to prevent discrimination based on race, color or ethnic origin by any group, institution or INDIVIDUAL . . .

Article 3 "Particular efforts shall be made to prevent discrimination especially in the fields of civil rights, access to citizenship, education, employment, religion, occupation and housing. . . Everyone shall have equal access to any place or facility intended for use by the general public, without discrimination as to race colour or ethnic origin.

Article 4 "All States (nations - ed) shall take effective measures to REVISE GOVERNMENTAL AND OTHER POLICIES, AND TO RESCIND LAWS and regulations which have the effect of perpetuating and creating racial discrimination wherever it exists. They should PASS LEGISLATION for prohibiting such discrimination and take all appropriate measures to combat those prejudices which lead to racial discrimination.

Article 5 "An end shall be put without delay to governmental and other public policies of racial segregation.

Article 7 "Everyone has the right to equality before the law and to equal justice under the law. Everyone without distinction as to race, colour or ethnic origin has the right to security of person and protection by the State against violence or bodily harm whether inflicted by GOVERNMENT officials or by any individual or group of individuals.

"Everyone shall have the right to an effective remedy and protection against any discrimination he may suffer on the ground of race, colour or ethnic origin with respect to his fundamental rights and freedoms through INDEPENDENT NATIONAL TRIBUNALS (Federal Courts - ed) competent to deal with such matters.

Article 8 "All effective steps shall be taken immediately in the fields of, teaching, education and information (propaganda? - ed) with a view of eliminating racial discrimination and prejudice and promoting tolerance and friendship among nations and racial groups as well as to PROPAGATING the PURPOSES and PRINCIPLES of the Charter of the United Nations (NOT the Charter itself, just the purposes and principles of the Charter, whatever they are - ed). The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (which the U. S. Senate rejected - ed) and the Declaration on the granting of independence to colonial peoples and countries."

Note Article 8. The General Assembly now makes laws governing education in the States. No longer will the public schools teach the Declaration of Independence, the Constitution of the United States and the Bill of Rights. The Government in Washington has a MANDATE from the U. N. to teach the basic documents of the new World Government.

Article 9: "In order to put into effect the purposes and principles of the present Declaration ALL STATES SHALL TAKE IMMEDIATE AND POSITIVE MEASURES including legislative and OTHER measures, to prosecute and/or OUTLAW organizations which promote or incite to racial discrimination."

We deal here with the question of the authority of the United Nations to dictate to the Washington Government in the arrogant and authoritarian language set forth in this Declaration. We offer it as evidence that, regardless of what the American people or their Congress believe about the complete authority of the United Nations, the United Nations asserts this authority and, as we shall see, the Government of the United States recognizes it.

The question of the right or wrong of racial discrimination is not at issue here. What is of momentous importance is the recognized authority of the UN to order the Government of the United States to REVISE and RESCIND LAWS and to PASS LEGISLATION decreed by these resolutions—and to command the Government to create SPECIAL COURTS to try certain cases. Nor, so long as we remain a Member State of the United Nations may anyone properly question the authority of the United Nations to order us around like the Subject State that we have become. Article 25 was just a foot in the door. The Senate agreed to much of this before the treaty law was suspended. The Congress and the President have been responsible for much of it also. Now the authority of the UN is SUPREME. Nobody can question it.


CHAPTER FIVE

War By Resolution

Another operation in Resolution Law is currently in the news. A series of General Assembly Resolutions have been directed to Britain in the Rhodesian affair. Just as the UN may order Britain to do certain things and to go to war if it becomes necessary to carry out the orders, so may the UN dictate to us. In fact they have done it, and continue to do it. Our young men fight and die all over the world as we "accept and carry out" the decisions of the Security Council and the General Assembly. Strangely enough we find the term "one man, one vote," used frequently as the UN issues its mandates to the British Government. Quite evidently this is the source of the "one man, one vote" edict of the Supreme Court in the Re-apportionment decision.

Under the terms of the Charter, as it is interpreted by the UN, the Colonial Powers were required to give up their colonies at the end of World War Two. Southern Rhodesia was a colony of Great Britain and in 1961 Rhodesia "jumped the gun" and declared her independence. Britain knowing that she would eventually have to free Rhodesia, raised no objection. In fact Britain co-operated with Rhodesia in establishing the new government and in writing the new constitution and setting the date for elections. Everything was peaceful and harmonious.

Then the UN got into the act, demanding that Britain RESCIND the Constitution of Rhodesia.—TAKE BACK this colony and hold it under British protection until such time as Rhodesia established a new government based on the principle of "one man, one vote". The "free" press has given us the impression that Rhodesia has just recently seceded from British control. The fact set forth in the British reply to the UN MANDATE, as reported in the UN publication, Everyone's United Nations, Pg. 388, indicate the British position:

"Prior to this Assembly action the United Kingdom had stated through its representative that the United Nations bad- no authority to intervene in the affairs of Southern Rhodesia and he formally recorded the objection of his government to any resolutions that might be adopted. The Constitutional Position was that since 1923 his government had had no effective power to legislate for Southern Rhodesian internal affairs and could not now intervene without the consent of the Government of Southern Rhodesia. His government could not transmit information to the United Nations because it did not have the Constitutional right or power to require the Government of Southern Rhodesia to provide the United Kingdom with information."

The General Assembly, upon receipt of the British reply, adopted another resolution condemning Britain for her position and renewing the UN demand that Britain take back Rhodesia. The UN "found" that the British Government, in effect, did not know what it was talking about. The UN held that Britain had both the power and the right to do as the General Assembly commanded and she had better get about it.

When Britain failed to comply, the General Assembly adopted another resolution invoking initial sanctions against Britain. This brought Britain to heel and she promised to try to persuade Rhodesia to cooperate and to use every means SHORT OF WAR. Britain made it very clear she would not go to war with her former colony. This brought forth another General Assembly resolution commanding Britain to subdue Rhodesia by whatever means were required to do it. If it required war, then Britain will go to war. Furthermore, the UN could order the United States to take on that war, or to help Britain. The UN could take over in its own name and commit OUR armed forces. This is the fearful power "our" Senate has conferred upon the United Nations.

These had all been General Assembly resolutions. The next resolution came from the Security Council decreeing an embargo on oil to Rhodesia. Article 25 does not mention the decisions of the General Assembly and apparently the British Parliament was not taking them very seriously, but a Security Council resolution was something else. They knew this was serious. They called in the Prime Minister demanding an explanation for the British vote in the Security Council which had been cast in favor of the embargo.

The Prime Minister attempted to throw Parliament a curve by asserting that he did not regard the Security Council resolution as "mandatory." This brought down the House. Parliament had become familiar with Article 25 and they finally came to realize the extent of which Britain was committed under the UN Charter. The indignation of Parliament was so great that the Prime Minister was obliged to sit down while the clerk restored order.

It might be noted in passing that had Britain refrained from voting for the resolution,—or had voted against it,—the resolution would have failed. A vote of ALL FIVE Permanent members is required to adopt a resolution in the Security Council. The British delegate takes the same oath of office that the American delegate takes,—he votes in the interest of the UN ONLY.

In the light of the Charter provisions, requiring the colonial powers to surrender their colonies upon accepting membership in the U. N., it is interesting to contemplate the attitude of France. Just why did France become involved in the bloody and expensive war of attrition in her former colonies in Algeria and French Indo China? Was it because the French Government delegation to the United Nations Conference,—or the French Government—did not dare tell the French people, after the long and expensive experience in World War II, that she would have to surrender her valuable colonial possessions? Had a war been necessary to convince the French that they would have to get out of Southeast Asia?

It is now being admitted in official circles,—the late Winston Churchill complains rather bitterly about it in his last book,—that toward the end of World War Two, President Roosevelt, who knew the provisions of the United Nations Charter which had been approved at Yalta, informed our allies, England, France, Belgium, and Holland, that they would have to "ease" themselves out of their colonies if they were to achieve debt cancellation and aid. The colonial powers, with an unpayable debt to cope with, had no choice. They agreed. The Marshall Plan aid followed the debt arrangements and the colonial powers, using the "student riots" as an excuse, gradually "eased" out of the colonies and in time became far richer without the colonies than they had ever been with them.

The student rioters, all trained for their positions of leadership in the Foundation financed universities of the United States and, to lesser extent in Europe, took over in one little country after the other, again without a hitch. Everything came off as though long planned and rehearsed. The Foreign Aid program of the United States began working wonders in Africa and Southeast Asia. Everything was ready for the building of a great industrial empire. More than a THOUSAND MILLION DOLLARS of Foreign Aid poured into this area within a few years. The money could not be spent,—not even by the "experts" as fast as it poured in. Time and opportunity have brought the American investment in this area to more than a hundred BILLION dollars but still it is not enough. The Empire Builders must have the SAVINGS which will result from disarmament.

Returning Senators and Congressmen complain loudly about the seemingly useless expenditure of money all over the world. They complain and they insist they do not see any sense of it, but year after year they appropriate the money for it, sometimes more than the spenders ask for.

In the early days of foreign aid they fussed about the roads and railroads that went nowhere—the dams and power plants that served nobody, the piles of expensive equipment rusting along the highways. In later years they began to understand the purpose of all this—it will be put to use as the course of empire wends its way.


CHAPTER SIX

Financing World Empire

The industrial build-up of Africa is incredible,—it is absolutely fantastic.

It is all under the control of the United Nations. The United Nations is quietly and most efficiently going about the work for which it was created. There are many UN agencies engaged in this global project and other organizations from Member Nations render valuable assistance. The principal governmental organization involved is the U S Agency for International Development. Of the more than TWO HUNDRED THOUSAND "intellectuals" scouring the earth to find places to spend our money, seventy-five thousand of them are on the payroll of the Agency for International Development, commonly called AID.

Shortly after the United Nations came into being, another Charter, that of the International Bank of Reconstruction and Development, the World Bank, was ratified by the Treaty as a treaty. The UN had come equipped with its own Supreme Court,—the International Court of Justice, whose Charter had been adopted by the Senate at the same time as that of the United Nations. Now it had its own World Bank. They were losing no time in equipping themselves with the trappings of empire. Perhaps some notes on the subject of the World Bank will indicate what the UN had in mind. And it was not, by any stretch of the imagination, "international peace and security."

The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development was just one of four World banks incorporated into the UN system in its early days. The IBRD was the largest of these and was forced to "provide and facilitate international investment in projects intended to increase production, raise living standards, and help bring about a better balance in world trade."

This bank began with a capitalization of TEN BILLION dollars. After a few years the capitalization was raised to TWENTY-ONE BILLION dollars. Most of the money came, in one way or another, from the producers of the United States who have been forced into unpayable debt to finance the numerous world building projects of the United Nations. The 1963-64 report of the World Bank states: "The Bank began its operations in 1946. Since then it has made 349 loans amounting to more than $7,000,000,000 in 64 Member countries and overseas territories." The report continues to relate that the largest categories for bank lending are for the development of electric power ($2,235,000,000) and for transportation ($2,260,000,000). How, if ever, these "loans" are to be re-paid is not stated.

A map shown on the UN publication "Helping Economic Development in Asia and the Far East" might help the reader get a preview of what is to come if UN plans go not awry. After describing the terrain of the Continent of Asia as mountainous and rocky, rendering road construction very expensive,—the article goes on to state that in the interest of international trade among the nations of Asia the UN is planning (in 1963) a network of roads in Asia which will provide 34,000 miles of hard top transportation. In case you have missed the implication of these figures it might be pointed out that this is the equivalent of TEN roads from New York to California. And this is just one of THOUSANDS of world building projects in operation or on the drawing boards of the UN and its agencies.

This sort of thing cannot be paid for in cash. There isn't that much money in the world. The wealth of the American people is being pledged for the bulk of the spending while the UN is taking the credit for it. What the UN finances, the UN controls. Page 44 of the Bank report relates:

"Agreement has been reached on the roads to be included in the network, on priorities for construction and on minimum construction standards. A code has been drawn up to govern traffic on the Asian highway."

The code contains provisions for international driving permits, a uniform system of road signs and signals, pavement markings and road work signs. I quote from the "United Nations Development Decade," page 69:

"The plans for a Pan-American Highway (already in an advanced stage of completion) and an Asian highway show the kind of project now being undertaken. These projects will probably be considerably expanded under international auspices. Similar programs will be undertaken elsewhere, especially in Africa. Networks of the transcontinental highways will have to be planned in advance and coordinated with the general economic development plans of the countries concerned. The investment required for such large modern highways will have to be encouraged and offered adequate protection."

Page 44 of the Bank Report relates:

"In the field of railways one of ECAFE's principal achievements has been the establishment in Lahore, Pakistan, of a United Nations training center for Railway Operating and Signaling Officials . . . Studies and recommendations made by ECAFE concerning railroads have included improved methods of track construction and maintenance; speedier turn-around of rolling stock; augmented capacity of single track lines; railway track sleepers and problems of attaining higher train speeds in relation to track maintenance, and better design for rolling stock."

In addition to the foreign aid investments of the American taxpayer, many other nations, all of whom have been, or still are, on our gift list, have been contributing to the empire building. A study of the mountain of U. N. documents on the subject gives evidence that even the fabulous sums of foreign aid and other contributions filched from our taxpayers will not pay for the grandiose plans of the more than TWO HUNDRED THOUSAND planners and spenders working on the U. N. projects.

The following might shed some light on the REAL reason the American forces are in Viet Nam:

"One of the most ambitious projects instigated and promoted by ECAFE (Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East —ed.) is the development of the lower Mekong River Basin, which is shared by Cambodia, Laos, Thailand and Viet Nam. . . the Mekong project is a unique effort in the history of international cooperation. . . The first five year programs of INVESTIGATIONS has been virtually completed. . . and a second five year INVESTIGATION programme expected to cost about 21 million dollars has been drawn up."

Practical men might regard this as expensive investigation—more than forty million dollars worth of it—for ONE PROJECT in a two-year period. This report was made in 1962. If we can just keep in mind, if we can grasp the fact at all, the International Development in UNese means development of the whole world —putting the whole world into production-then it will be seen that the term "Empire-Building" is not a cliche, but a solid fact.

In early 1961, the President declared a Development Decade from 1960 to 1970. At the end of that Decade the U. N. expected to have Africa, Asia and South America in an advanced state of industrialization. At the end of the first half of the decade they had made great progress and have every reason to better this showing in the last half as they collect more and more of the money saved by disarmament. In the meantime, the planners and other "experts," unable to produce anything but plans and programs, go merrily along, dreaming and committing the dreams to paper while they await the time when the plans will be put into effect by PRODUCERS.

These self-styled "intellectuals" are putting in time as they await the day when the established fact of World Empire can be revealed and the whole global project set in motion. On that great day, these will become the herd masters on the International Animal Farm. They do not ask or expect command positions. They know who will be in charge. It is enough for them that they supervise the great new world of their creation and retain a place at the second table.

Nothing could better illustrate the enormity of the Empire-building project than some of the U. N. reports on the PLANNING STAGES:

"RESEARCH AND STATISTICS: No statistics are necessary to prove that the people of Asia and the Far East have relatively low standards of living, or that with a few exceptions, their agriculture is backward and their industries under-developed. But to tackle these problems exact information is necessary. Here we come up against a difficulty which ECAFE has faced from the beginning and has not yet overcome: the inadequacy of accurate economic data for the many countries of the region.

"Clearly the statistical basis must be improved if the questions concerning ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT are to be tackled satisfactorily. (Since its start in 1947 —ed.) ECAFE has collected and assessed statistics from the various countries of the region and has cooperated in improving methods through regional conferences of statisticians. This work gained impetus after the Conference of Asian statisticians was established as a permanent body in 1957.

"The main purpose of the Conference is to further sound statistical development within each country, and to do this expert groups meet frequently to discuss statistical problems of common interest in their countries. . . Beginning in 1957 the official publication has, in addition to a review of the current economic situation in Asia. taken up each year the study of one major economic problem, for example, types of the ECONOMY prevailing in the ECAFE region . . . post-war INDUSTRIALIZATION; post-war trade; post-war finance; economic growth; Asia's trade with Western Europe. .. import substitution and export diversification."

These multi-billion dollar "think" projects have not succeeded in getting the industrialization effort off the around. Hence the announcement by the President of the creation of the "Asian Executive Service Corps" headed by Mr. Eugene Black, former head of the World Bank, Vice-president of the Chase Manhattan Bank and Member of the Council on Foreign Relations. It may safely be assumed that Mr. Black and his associates will get things moving and that the PROFIT MOTIVE will not be overlooked in the process.

On Page 55 of The U. N. Development Decade, we find:

"The General Assembly has expressed concern over the inadequacy of what is being done to help industrial development. . . and the Economic and Social Council has stated that more technical assistance and pre-investment expenditure must be devoted to industrial development. .. The program of action proposed. . . includes research and operational activities which are complimentary and mutually supporting. They are as follows:

"Support of industrial planning and project planning. Extension of industries advisory services. Promotion of small industries, with special emphasis on industrial estates.

"Particular attention will be given to drawing up priorities for industries and making forecasts of the demand for industrial products (page 56) . . .It is proposed to assemble a group of experts with supporting staff. Each expert will be familiar with industrial planning and programming in general and with particular sectors of industry, but specialized consultants (experienced men?—ed.) will also be needed in certain cases. Close cooperation between the economic and technical experts should ensure greater coordination of, the economic and engineering aspects of industrial planning."

Time and space do not permit further discussion of the World Industrial Development Program. There is literally hundreds of TONS of official U. N. information on the subject.

The point to be made is simply that the United Nations IS engaged in World Empire building in Africa and in Asia and the work is far advanced. It might be well to point out also that, should this vast area be put into industrial production, it will require many MILLIONS of SKILLED industrial workers and considerable skilled management. This labor and management are to be found only in highly industrialized nations, principally in the United States.

It might be suggested also, that the existing monetary systems of the civilized world will not begin to support the world-wide programs of the United Nations and that this is the real reason the International Currency is being prepared for launching. The World Government, which is the U. N., proposes to issue a WORLD CURRENCY and issue all currency through the World Bank which is a U. N. institution. Still the American people refuse to believe that the United Nations IS A WORLD GOVERNMENT.


CHAPTER SEVEN

Communication Well In Hand

Control of communications has been accepted as IMPERATIVE to the rule of the world since the days of Adam Weishaupt, two hundred years ago. The Empire-Builders in the United States have effectively gained control of communications and now we find that the United Nations is moving into this field. There is great and immediate need for controlled PROPAGANDA to keep the world producers in line before the industrialization of the world advances further. This the U. N. must provide. Page 72, U. N. Development Decade:

PUBLIC SUPPORT FOR THE DEVELOPMENT DECADE

"Considerable experience has been gained during the past years in another aspect of the problem,—that of more effectively utilizing the technical means of communication and media of information for enlisting public support for the objectives set forth in General Assembly Resolution 1710. There is a need therefore. . . to ensure that national and international information services are concentrated more closely on the task of presenting to the world public a more meaningful picture of the importance of economic and social development to the welfare of the World as a whole and of the actual steps being taken to achieve this end.

"The primary responsibility must rest of course, with national and international media and services, pubic and private. However, a significant contribution to such national efforts can be made by the information services of the United Nations organizations."

This idea was propounded and put into effect through General Assembly Resolution No. 1710 MORE, THAN THREE YEARS AGO. Now, in 1965, "we" can learn practically nothing—and what little we learn is unreliable—of the war in Viet Nam, the revolution in the Dominican Republic and other vital information that we might obtain ONLY THROUGH A FREE PRESS. We might well ask at this point, just to what extent has the United Nations taken control of the news media, worldwide? We might explore the subject a little farther as space permits.

(Page 71) "A UNESCO report and a subsequent Council (Security Council—ed.) resolution No. 819 provide detailed guidance as to specific measures which may be taken for the expansion of means of mass communications as part of the United Nations Development Decade.

"The minimum standards established by UNESCO and endorsed by the Council are that for every 100 inhabitants in any country there should be at least ten copies of a daily newspaper, five radio sets, and two cinema (TV—ed.) sets. These are standards which have not yet been attained by some 2,000 million people.

"It has been roughly estimated that the establishment of new—and the expansion of existing facilities—to reach the UNESCO target would necessitate an investment of some $2,000 million. If educational television is included the total cost. .. would be $3,400 million. This is the sum required for capital expenditure only, without provision for recurring annual costs."

That the above is not just talk,—that the U. N. means business in the public communications and propaganda fields is indicated by the following:

"Development of information media in Asia is a matter of continuing concern to ECAFE. . .ECAFE is therefore cooperating closely with UNESCO (the master propaganda arm of UN-ed.) and other specialized agencies in developing information media in Asia, within the frame-work of national and regional development plans. A United Nations seminar on Freedom of Information in Asia . . .concluded that ECAFE was the appropriate body for initiating the planning and development of information media in the region particularly as regards telecommunications, the manufacture of low-cost radio receivers and newsprint. . . ECAFE is collaborating with ITC (International Telecommunications Commission —ed.) to prepare specifications for low cost radio receivers and studying other aspects of radio coverage as well as the design and distribution of transmitting stations. Countries in the region have also been advised to explore the possibilities of organizing regional production centers to ensure the supply of such radio receivers.

"Another problem has been the fact that while producing countries are faced with over-production of printing paper, several countries of the region are experiencing a shortage of newsprint. . .The Commission (ITC—ed.) is helping member governments affected by such shortages to explore ways of increasing supplies of newsprint and other paper. The possibility of establishing regional paper mills may also be explored."

Be reminded again that these proclamations came from the U. N. and its agencies in 1962. There is a definite intent expressed here to exert strong influence —if not actual control—over the world's press. We have not been getting vital information through our press; in fact the press which certainly could and should have reported to the people the real purposes of the United Nations and its rapidly expanding World Empire have utterly and completely failed to do so. Instead they continue to mislead us—to lie to us—to convince us that the sole purpose of the United Nations is to keep World Peace by talking in the U. N. headquarters in New York.

Nothing has ever been said by the nation's press about the U. N. activity in the field of world-wide communications and the building of factories to supply radios and newsprint to spread its propaganda world-wide. The World Government has established the necessary means to get out ITS COMMANDS to the captive peoples of the World as soon as it announces the TAKE-OVER.

In the final analysis, we have a problem too. Millions of Americans live in fear of atom bombs and a nuclear holocaust. Our own propaganda media has instilled this fear. Other millions fear a "communist" take-over—not necessarily a "Russian" action—but something coming from WITHIN our borders. Many of these people have armed themselves with a view to resistance.

It may well be that the television is a far more menacing weapon than anything "communists", or anybody, could use against us. Just consider what would happen if the President, or somebody speaking or presumably speaking for him, appeared on the TV screen proclaiming a national emergency. All men—and perhaps women—would be directed to report at a specified station—police station, schoolhouse—anywhere men might be gathered in. Almost to a man (or woman), they would go. THEY WOULD TURN THEMSELVES IN, without question. This is the power inherent in propaganda—and the television system. Communications in the hands of an enemy—and the U. N. IS an enemy—conceivably might CONQUER THE WORLD and end the "long twilight" of world revolution.


CHAPTER EIGHT

High Jinks In Finances

Armed with the $21,000,000,000 Capitalization, the World Bank smooths the path for world development. Within a few years after the organization of the international Bank for Reconstruction and Development three other world-wide banking institutions were established. Later, branch banks came into being and finally dozens of regional and district banks were established. The U. N. has put the world in the banking business. . . .the empire-building projects of the U. N. require no less—and probably a lot more—as they insist that their activities must be DOUBLED if they are to reach their goal. This is the goal proclaimed by Council on Foreign Relations member-agent, Elmo Roper: "Our goal is Government of all the World."

Some of the activities of the World Bank known as IDA, International Development Association (not to be confused with AID), the pipe-line which carries the money from Congress to its various U. N. destinations), ARE ENLIGHTENING. Their publication, Policies and Operations of the World Bank, offers this:

Page 55: TRANSPORTATION

"Bank lending for the development of transportation has amounted to $2,260,000,000. Funds have been lent in more than 40 countries for rail, stock, or air transport, ports, waterways, shipping, aerial ropeways and pipelines... While most of the money went to import locomotives or rolling stock, the loans are also assisting in the construction of new rail lines and repair shops in some countries and rehabilitation (of rail lines—ed.) in others. India alone has received $378,000,000 for the modernization and expansion of its railway system. . . The largest loan yet made was one of $72,000,000 to construct or improve approximately 1,800 miles of (OIL-RICH—ed.) Iran's highway network.

". . . Pakistan received a loan for the construction of a 350 mile natural gas pipe-line which is supplying fuel for industrial expansion. . . and bank funds are building a 41 mile oil pipeline in Tobago and Trinidad to bring fuel to a power station also being built with Bank assistance. .. Another loan helped to pay for a 412 mile oil pipe-line from the Hassi Messaoud oil field in the Sahara to the Algerian port of Bougie on the Mediterranean. Aerial rope lines being erected from coal mines to a privately owned steel mill in India will relieve congestion or the railways."

It might occur to somebody to ask just why the tax monies of the American Producer should be devoted to the building of oil and gas pipe-lines in these far-off countries. Informed people everywhere know that OIL is cartelist property; those who reap the profits from oil and gas are well able to pay for their own pipe-lines. This should raise the question: WHO WILL OWN THIS PROPERTY in which America has so much invested--THOUSANDS OF MILLIONS of dollars worth of wealth created through OUR TAX MONEY? When we deal with the subject of INDUSTRIALIZATION we are dealing with the profit motive. If we pay for all this—who should own it?

The World Bank report sheds further light on this subject, page 57:

"INDUSTRY: Bank lending for industry now totals more than $1,129,000,000. Countries in Asia have been the largest industrial borrowers. In Japan the chief beneficiaries have been the LEADING STEEL PRODUCERS (now in competition with our own steel—ed.) In India two PRIVATE Steel companies have borrowed about $157,000,000 for their expansion programmes. Other industrial loans have included funds for manufacturers of paper products; the paper and boards industries; the development of deposits of manganese and iron ore; steel production and a wide variety of industrial undertakings in Southern Italy.

"Some of the loans have been made directly to PRIVATE industries, with government guarantees; others have been made to governments or government financing institutions which re-lend or allocate the proceeds to manufacturing or mining enterprises, and finally some have been made to development banks. "

This free-handed "lending" of tax monies is an ever-expanding project of the United Nations and its agencies. It will continue to expand until the funds dry up. The United Nations and its agencies will NEVER CURTAIL the demands and expenditures on their own initiative. They are out to build a World Empire and they are getting along famously. However, it becomes more and more apparent that they cannot complete this global industrialization program without an international currency. In the early days of the government, of course, management and labor will have to be paid. The World Government must issue its own money, which they propose to do through the International Monetary Fund.

This is not the real and imminent peril which faces America. The plans and preparation for empire-building are largely still on paper. As the plans were adopted, the money was appropriated, but, due to the lack of skilled labor and management, much of this money—nearly TWENTY THOUSAND MILLION of it, at last report—was in the pipeline. It is available to meet payrolls for skilled labor and management for a long, long time. The Agency for International Development and other U. N. spending agencies have been given so much money by the Congress and the legislatures of other governments, that they simply could not spend it. It has become obvious to the "intellectuals" —even as it would have been obvious to an average American at a much earlier date—that the NATIVES WILL NOT, IN THE FORESEEABLE FUTURE, be able to get these plans and programs into operation. In November, 1961, (page 64), Mr. Eugene Black of the Executive Service Corps (Asia) said:

"Our experience continues to confirm that shortage of capital is not the only, and indeed not the principal, obstacle to more rapid economic progress in the less developed countries. Inexperience and lack of trained manpower at every level are even more serious handicaps."

The billions of dollars appropriated for the "development of the underdeveloped areas" were based on the "intellectual" theory that natives of Asia and Africa could be put to work in industrial production if the industries were established for them. In fact, they, the "intellectuals," believed the natives, given a little encouragement, could establish the industries on their own. It came as a terrific shock to the "intellectual" community to learn that the average native could not punch a time-clock because he could not read. Now they propose to spend more thousands of millions of dollars to "educate the natives—at least to the point where they can punch time-clocks.

Before leaving the subject of the World Bank, it might be well to consider the stability of such a "lending" institution and how the Bank "influenced" the in• vesting money to buy its bonds. Of greater importance to many unsuspecting Americans is the question of WHO buys these bonds.

On page 82, we find that the only market able to provide funds in the Bank's early years was that of the United States. Even here the financing was difficult. The "financial community" distrusting any investment connected with international lending and in the Bank's first years federal and state laws prevented any investor from purchasing the Bank's bonds. Early in 1947, therefore, the Bank began its own propaganda operation and by 1963 the bonds, subject to various statutory and administrative qualifications, became legal investment for:

"Commercial Banks in 49 States and the District of Columbia. Savings Banks in 28 States and the District of Columbia. Life Insurance Companies in 48 States and the District of Columbia. Other insurance Companies in 46 States and the District of Columbia. Trust funds in 44 States and the District of Columbia.

"In addition, TEN STATES have passed legislation authorizing the investment of public funds in obligations of the Bank and in a number of other States IT IS BELIEVED that public funds may be invested in Bank obligations under legislation affecting the eligibility of these obligations for institutional investors. As a result, substantial investments in Bank bonds have been made by administrators of public funds, STATE EMPLOYES PENSION FUNDS being the main buyers in this category."

Anyone interested in further informaton on this subject might send to his congressman for a copy of Public Law No. 142, 81st Congress, Act of June 29, 1949. It might be well, also, for citizens of the several States to learn just how far their States are involved in the "obligations" and operations of this United Nations agency. Another item for consideration is this:

"The sale abroad of the United States dollar issues has been assisted by certain exemptions from U. S. taxes accruing to holders of World Bank bonds and notes, who are non-resident aliens or foreign corporations."

Many volumes could be consumed in discussion of the various World Banks. In this little publication nothing more can be done than barely raise the curtain in the hope that inquiring minds, attuned to financial matters, will continue a study of the subject and be prepared to help the nation meet the consequences of this high-flying financial manipulation of the property and credit of the American People.

A little time must be devoted to a report on the International Finance Corporation, one of the many off, shoots of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development. "It," according to this report on the World Bank, IDA and IFC, "provides financing in association with private investors, without government guarantee of repayment, in cases where sufficient private capital is not available on reasonable terms-

"Seeks to create investment opportunities by bringing together domestic and foreign investors and experienced management and endeavors to stimulate the flow of private capital into productive investment in member countries."

This strange policy of mingling public and private funds in worldwide financial speculation, admittedly FOR PROFIT, takes some strange twists:

"IFC (International Finance Corporation—ed.) loans are made without government guarantee. The Corporation ordinarily does not require guarantees of repayment by banks, or parent or affiliated companies, but may request guarantees in certain cases."

These policies are not in accordance with sound banking practices, as we understand them, in this country. This brings up the question of whether or not the Trust Funds from STATE EMPLOYEES PENSION FUNDS are safely or properly invested in the debt securities of such institutions. By their own confession, they say that these investments were frowned upon in the legitimate investment banking community and that they were forced to propagandize certain states in these United States. Apparently this was necessary in no other country, for they claim there was no market for such securities anywhere except in the United States. COMPLETELY UNINFORMED state officials had to be persuaded to enact special legislation to permit investment of public trust funds.

The Charters of these United Nations banks provide excellent study material for interested students of the world economy. All four of the major world banks have almost identical charters and all contain this provision:

"To the extent necessary to carry out the operations provided for in this Agreement and subject to the provisos of this Agreement, all property and assets of the Association shall be free from restrictions, regulations, controls and moratoria of any nature. . . All Governors, Executive Directors. Alternates, officers and employees of the Association shall be immune from legal process with respect to acts performed by them in their official capacity except when the Associaton waives this immunity. . ."

The financial operations of the United Nations might well become the most absorbing subject of a twenty-five foot shelf of books. Even "our" own transactions with the U. N. Organization, in the matter of meeting "our" financial commitments, are tainted with the all-inclusive fraud of the World Government.

The Constitution of the PRE-REVOLUTIONARY Government of the United States of America provided in Article 1, Section 7, Paragraph 1:

"All bills for raising revenue shall originate in the House of Representatives, but the Senate may propose or concur with amendments as with other bills."

Thus reads the good old plain English of the deceased Constitution of the United States of America. There is no evasion or double-talk here. A child can understand this and so it was intended. We must assume that members of BOTH HOUSES OF CONGRESS understand this also, unless we have become convinced that Congress lacks the mentality of the average child.

Most of the Charter provisions required implementation. Acts of Congress were required to put the Charter provisions into effect. One of the first acts of implementation was the United Nations Participation Act of 1945, as amended, October 19, 1949. Congress itself enacted this law which PLAINLY VIOLATED THE CONSTITUTION and indicates to the writer, at least, that Congress, at the time, KNEW the Constitution had been abandoned. They were prepared to abolish it completely. Section 8 of the U. N. Participation Act, as amended, provides:

"There is hereby authorized to be APPROPRIATED ANNUALLY TO THE DEPARTMENT OF STATE OUT OF ANY MONEY IN THE TREASURY not otherwise appropriated, such sums as may be necessary for the payment by the United States of its share of the expenses of the United Nations as apportioned by the General Assembly…"

This is an appropriation bill which did not originate in Congress. There is nothing here to indicate that Congress needed to know anything about it. Perhaps it is none of the business of Congress to know how the Member State, UNDER U. N. DISCIPLINE, appropriates money for the World Government, nor will Congress determine the amount to be paid. The General Assembly will decree the amount of our tax money to be DRAWN DIRECTLY FROM THE TREASURY by the Secretary of State.

The General disregard, if not actual contempt, of the United Nations for the Congress of the United States was brought to light when the Congress passed a LAW that the Government of the United States could not be assessed for more than a third of the cost of the United Nations budget in any given year. The very first budget drawn up by the General Assembly, following enactment of this law, assessed the U. S. for MORE than one third and the 1965 budget called for 39% to be paid by good old Uncle Sam. What does Congress do about it? A few of them COMPLAIN, that's all. They will not tangle with the U. N., not so long, at least, as the Government of the United States is under U. N. DISCIPLINE.

We might digress for a moment to quote another provision of the U. N. Participation Act, which is illuminating. This section confers upon the President powers which were not permitted to him under the Constitution, but which became MANDATORY, by U. N. interpretation, under the Charter. The Congress is simply "implementing" Charter provisions in adopting this in Section 5. (a):

"Notwithstanding the provisions of ANY OTHER LAW, whenever the United States is called upon by the Security Council to apply measures which said Council has decided, pursuant to Article 41 of the Charter, are to be employed to give effect to its decisions under said Charter, the President may, to the extent necessary to apply such measures, THROUGH ANY AGENCY WHICH HE MAY DESIGNATE and under such orders, rules and regulations as may be prescribed by him, INVESTIGATE, REGULATE OR PROHIBIT in whole or in part, ECONOMIC RELATIONS, or rail, sea, air, postal. telegraphic, radio and other means of communication between any foreign country or any national thereof or any person therein and the United States or ANY PERSON SUBJECT TO THE JURISDICTION thereof, of involving any property subject to the jurisdiction of the United States.

"(b) Any person who willfully violates or evades or attempts to violate or evade any order, rule or regulation issued by the President pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section shall, upon conviction be fined not more than $10,000 or, if a natural person be imprisoned for a period of not more than ten years or both the officer, director or agent of any corporation who knowingly participates in such violation or evasion shall be punished by a like fine, imprisonment or both and ANY PROPERTY, FUNDS SECURITIES, PAPERS or other articles or documents, or any vessel, together with her tackle, apparel, furniture and equipment, or vehicle or aircraft concerned in such violation shall be forfeited to the United States."

This act of Congress was necessary to put into effect OUR COMMITMENTS to the United Nations under the Charter. The SECURITY COUNCIL was authorized to issue decrees which we were BOUND to

"ACCEPT AND CARRY OUT."

The U. N. Participation Act was the LAW permitting the President to ACCEPT AND CARRY OUT the decisions of the Security Council. No national or state law can interfere with the enforcement of any Security Council decree. Note the opening words of Section 5, which are repeated in Section 7:

"Notwithstanding the provisions of ANY OTHER LAW."

Indicative of the fraud and outlawry of the whole United Nations system is the frank and open violation in Viet-Nam, with the tacit approval of the U. N., of Section 7 (a), par. (1):

(a), par. (1):

"The detail to the United Nations under such terms and conditions as the President shall determine, of personnel of the armed forces of the United States to serve as observers, guards, or in any non-combatant capacity, but in no event shall a total of one thousand of such personnel be so detailed at any one time."

A later Chapter of this book will be devoted to Viet-Nam and our "solemn commitments" under the SEATO treaty. We point out here, that there were many times one THOUSAND men "at any one time," acting as "guards" and "observers" in Viet-Nam, before it was conceded that we were in a war.


CHAPTER NINE

American Labor UN-ternationalized

Representing, as they do, the U. N. ONLY, the delegates to the various U. N. agencies voted to appropriate the property and earning of their native countries to serve U. N. interests alone. A proper majority is two-thirds of the General Assembly and this proper majority now rests with the African and Asian block. THEY CAN MUSTER A 2/3 VOTE ON ANYTHING NOW; THEY can compel any Member State of the U. N. to "accept and carry out" anything they decree, no matter what it is.

The intentions of the delegates in exercising the UNLIMITED POWER, now in their hands, became very clear and very terrifying to men of discernment, when UNCTAD (United Nations Conference on Trade and Development) met in Geneva in 1964 to assert the RIGHTS proclaimed for them by numerous General Assembly and UNESCO resolutions. These resolutions guaranteed that when the tribal nations had been put into industrial production, the Western industrialized nations would be forced to step aside and permit the production of these formerly "under-developed" nations to attain preference in the world markets.

This, too, was to be accomplished "notwithstanding the provisions of any other law" in any state or nation on earth. It was to be accomplished by TAXING the Western nations to SUBSIDIZE THEIR COMPETITION, by limiting or prohibiting the import of products from any but the "newly emerging nations" and in any other way the same purpose can be accomplished. By U. N. standards, the END ALWAYS JUSTIFIES THE MEANS.

The UNCTAD Conference was attended by delegations from seventy-seven new, emerging or under-level oped nations and thirty-five industrial nations. This conference was called as soon as the "emerging nations" had the necessary two-thirds vote the seventy seven voted right down the line for the same proposals. The report of the conference filled two hundred pages. The proposals to be voted on by the General Assembly, when the time is propitious, consist of such items as:

"Industrial countries to surrender control of existing trade and. industry to the under-developed nations; advanced countries release patents and inventions and stop technical developments that would improve their own industrial progress; industrial nations shall guarantee to buy products from under-developed nations at good prices so the poorer nations would not have to meet competition, and the industrial nations should provide the money for under-developed nations to build the plants which would make the products whose markets would be guaranteed."

There is NOTHING NEW about all this. Literally tons of United Nations publications have proclaimed these goals repeatedly in the past ten years. The press did not report it. The Government, always deaf, dumb and blind where United Nations ambitions are at stake, failed and refused to tell the People anything about it. The reason is evident—they are not out to foment COUNTER-REVOLUTION. The Houses of Congress, presumably informed of the destructive aims and purposes of the United Nations, obediently hand out thousands of millions of tax dollars to accomplish the very purposes set forth here. Congress accepts U. N. DISCIPLINE in our names and slavishly carries out the decrees of this outlaw organization.

The President is charged with seeing that these decrees are carried out without question or equivocation. This he has attempted to do, in the matter of accepting the dictates of UNCTAD, which may already have been adopted by the General Assembly and handed down to him by RESOLUTION. The Poverty Program is a step in the right direction; the Great Society is another. Both programs proclaim great benefits, not for the American People, but for the WHOLE WORLD. This is the reason Mr. Shriver heads both the Youth Corps and the Poverty Program. They are one and the same U. N. project. There can be no benefit to the American producer, labor and management alike, in the new move to REDISTRIBUTE THE WEALTH world-wide. This intention—to re-distribute the wealth of the world among all the people in the world—as long as it lasts, which will not be long—is firmly imbedded in the U. N. Charter in the oft-repeated phrase, ECONOMIC EQUALITY.

Just as "racial equality" has been interpreted to mean "one man, one vote" so "economic equality" means one man, one dollar, ruble, peso or unit of INTERNATIONAL CURRENCY. All U. N. agencies are welded together in a perfectly organized and illimitable financed move toward that goal. This is stated in their own publications a thousand times over. These publications have limited circulation. The few who do read them either favor the drive for World Empire or fail to realize the import of the very cautious and evasive language through which the UN-ers express their intentions, their "principles and purposes."

The CHIEF of the U. N. agencies is the International Labour Organization. For many years, the American delegates have been Jay Lovestone and Irving Brown, both long-recognized as "communists," both having found it advisable to move to another land. Lovestone was a charter member of the Communist Party, U. S. A. Both feel quite at home in their present surroundings. Both are C. F. R. member agents.

The International Labour Organization proposes to control Labour world-wide. It has numerous charters, some of which have been adopted by the United States Senate as Treaties. We have accepted the provisions of this organization's charters as LAW of the land and have agreed to conform to them "notwithstanding the provisions of any other law."

The U. N. empires in Asia and Africa will require millions of skilled industrial laborers and an immense segment of industrial management. They will not be hiring the top executives. These have already been called into service. About two years ago Mr. Jacob Javits, U. S. Senator from New York, who appears to be the official spokesman for the Council on Foreign Relations in the Senate, told the Senate that he and David Rockefeller had been discussing matters and had come to the conclusion that the business situation in Africa would be helped immensely if there could be appointed an "Executive Service Corps"—a group, or committee of "distinguished" businessmen who would lead the industrial progress of Africa and, in time, of other "developing areas."

Sure enough, within a few months the President did appoint an Executive Service Corps, the Chairman—SURPRISE?— Mr. David Rockefeller. The Committee is, almost exclusively, a Council on Foreign Relations outfit. They will not necessarily go to Africa to handle things and get our tax money out of the "pipeline," but they will undertake the job of getting the whole industrial empire project moving.

Paul Hoffman and his wife, the former Anna Rosenberg. have been running the show and Pail opines that he will need 250,000 EXECUTIVES to handle the job. A brochure of the Agency for International Development (AID) has come to the desk of the writer, each page marked top and bottom, in large black print: LIMITED OFFICIAL USE. This tells of the enormous needs in man-power and materials to get the industrialization of Africa moving toward its goal. The publication asserts that the labor and industrial management needed to meet their requirements, must come from "overseas" and they hint that they do not anticipate difficulty in getting this labor and management because the United Nations has ways and means to get things done. A brief sketch of the policies of the International Labour Organization might suggest several methods.

The I. L. O., which was organized during the term of the League of Nations, was adopted into the United Nations with TREATY STATUS and so recognized by the United States Senate, has used its enormous work force to collect labor statistics world-wide. They have an enormous collection and they do not collect them as a hobby. The I. L. 0. has published a little booklet, "Lasting Peace the I. L. 0. Way." This little gem starts right off by informing its readers that its existence predated the information of the U. N. by many years. It then goes on to say:

"Most simply,—the I. L. 0. is an ASSOCIATION OF NATIONS—an association created to do a specific job. This job is to improve working and living conditions all over the world. .. Beyond this immediate purpose is the longer range objective of helping to ESTABLISH AN INTERNATIONAL COMMUNITY OF NATIONS in which all peoples may live at peace and amid steadily increasing prosperity."

The I. L. 0. has always been long on proclamation but, unfortunately, their proclamations have a weird way of becoming LAW in the United States. The little publication under discussion shows that practically ALL United States Labor Laws and many of the outlandish Agricultural Laws and directives also come from the International Labour Organization. We find that the I. L. 0., at least, recognized that the SOLE purpose of the U. N. was not in maintaining "international peace and security." On Page 7, they state the whole proposition:

"Today the I. L. 0. is associated with the United Nations in the great new effort to maintain peace and to FURTHER HUMAN PROGRESS that was launched with the signing of the United Nations Charter. . . The relationship is governed by an AGREEMENT in which the United Nations recognizes the I. L. 0. as a Specialized Agency RESPONSIBLE FOR ACTION TO ACCOMPLISH the aims set forth in its Constitution."

The I. L. 0. promptly got into the law-making business and laid the groundwork for the TREATY RACKET which was to follow in the United Nations twenty-five years later. On page 17, we find:

"The suggestion that the I. L. 0. should be an actual legislative body was rejected. Most governments (in 1919—ed.) found it impossible to accept a plan which would give to an international agency the power to legislate for them. . .

"The Commission finally hit upon a compromise. The solution it found is one of the features that makes the I. L. 0. unique among the international agencies today.

"Under this scheme, the Organization would draw up draft conventions similar to treaties. These would not automatically become binding upon the Member Countries but the members would be required to consider accepting or ratifying them. And once a country has ratified a Convention it would be required to give effect to it, and to submit reports on the way it was being done."

So we find that away back in 1919, the I. L. O. had hit upon a "scheme" making it COMPULSORY for any nation ratifying a Convention—as the United States ratified, the U. N. Convention (Charter), TO GIVE EFFECT TO IT." Just so, the United States Government is REQUIRED to give effect (accept and carry out) the provisions of the Charter of the United Nations.

In the Spring of 1944, reports the booklet, the General Conference of the I. L. 0. met in Philadelphia and drew up a declaration which the then President Roosevelt said summed up the "aspirations of an epoch which well has known two world wars and may well acquire a historical significance similar to that of the Declaration of Independence."

One of the proclamations of the I. L. 0. declaration was:

"Poverty anywhere constitutes a danger to prosperity everywhere. That the war against want requires to be carried on with unrelenting vigour within each nation and by continuous and concerted international effort. . . with a view of promotion of the common welfare." (of the world—ed.)

Here we find the REAL SOURCE of the War on Poverty. It was incorporated into the Charter of one of the I. L. O. bodies which, when adopted by the U. S. Senate as a treaty, became law of the land. Treaty Law, as had been stated, was succeeded by Resolution Law when President Eisenhower agreed, in order to kill off the Bricker Amendment, that Treaty Law would be suspended. President Johnson proclaimed War Against Poverty all Over the World AT THE EXPENSE OF THE UNITED STATES. In this, he is simply implementing the Treaty Law of the I. L. 0. and the Resolution Law of the United Nations itself.

The booklet then continues:

"The central aim for national and international policy, the Declaration asserts, must be the ATTAINMENT OF CONDITIONS in which all human beings have the right to pursue their material well-being and their spiritual development in conditions of freedom and dignity, of ECONOMIC SECURITY and EQUAL OPPORTUNITY."

American producers and taxpayers would do well to ponder the implications of this high-sounding rhetoric. In this country we are just beginning to experience the impact of the EQUAL OPPORTUNITY proclamations of the United Nations as IMPLEMENTED by Presidential decree, Court decision and Congressional action Equal opportunity—WORLD-WIDE—c a n be accomplished only through COMPULSION, compulsion which will deprive the American producer of the fruits of his production and make of him an economic slave to the lazy, the incompetent and the shiftless of the world. The declaration ends with an affirmation of the "RESPONSIBILITY" (DUTY or AUTHORITY) to examine and consider ALL international economic policies and measures in the LIGHT OF THIS OBJECTIVE.

The whole Poverty Program is taken from the Philadelphia Declaration of the International Labour Organization. A copy of the booklet, "Lasting Peace the I. L. 0. Way," may be obtained from the International Labour Office, Geneva, Switzerland; price 25 cents.

Under the paragraph, "Instrument for Peace," we find the popular propaganda line, which have been completely accepted by students and teachers in the school systems and universities and by unsophisticated parsons in the nation's pulpits, that poverty and ignorance breed wars. If, we would just educate the whole world and give them EQUAL OPPORTUNITY and ECONOMIC EQUALITY there would be no more war.

This logic is so shallow that the average bamboozled student sees the light in the first few seconds when a not-so-literate upstart explains that wars have always been caused by GREED and LUST FOR POWER. Wars have always been caused by the richest men in the warring countries. If the rich and the powerful, in any nation, did not want war, there would be no war simply because these men would shut off the money to the warring leaders. No poor person or group, no illiterate person or group, or both acting in unison, could start or carry on a major war. If elimination of the cause of war is the objective, then poverty and illiteracy are not the proper targets. The I. L. 0. is dead right about one thing: "To have permanent peace, the conditions for it must be established."

Under the Chapter "Attacking the Problem at the Roots" it is stated:

'"The I. L. O.'s efforts to banish poverty from the world extend beyond measures to relieve surface systems. The Organization has realized that it must come to grips with the basic causes of Impoverishment and misery if it is to achieve lasting success.

"This realization was expressed in the Declaration of Philadelphia with its assertions that national and international economic and financial policies must be judged in the light of the effect on social progress.

"The Declaration went on to say that the I. L. 0 should do the judging and take economic and financial factors into account in its decisions and recommendations. Thus the I. L. 0. was empowered to recommend the economic policies that it believed would result in an improvement in working and living conditions. It is only common sense that the I. L. O. should have this authority."

At this point Labor, the United Nations and the Council on Foreign Relations would appear to be in a hopeless and conflicting jumble. If it be true that the Council on Foreign Relations RULES the United Nations and that the International Labour Organization is the CHIEF agency of the United Nations, does this mean that there is a partnership between the Billionaire Elite of the C. F. R. and LABOR? There IS such a partnership and it has existed from the beginning of both organizations.

Briefly, the relationship is this: In the first decade of the 20th Century, the labor movement., seething with discontent engendered by the tyranny of ruthless and predatory capitalists and speculators from the large cities, began to organize into unions and other organizations—socialists, syndicalists, anarchists and even "communists." Many of them openly advocated the overthrow of the government and the extermination of the "Wolves of Wall Street!"

The situation was alarming. With the advent of World War I and American involvement in that war, with troops leaving the country while the revolutionaries remained at home, the Wolves of Wall Street were in a perilous situation. Among the most trusted of the Wall Street whelps was Edward M. House. His services were enlisted and he proceeded to round up the brightest and most unscrupulous members of the Intercollegiate Socialist Society, which was making phenomenal headway in the larger universities. These he organized into The Inquiry. Some of that number (150) were put to work preparing the Covenant of the League of Nations through which their new Wall Street mentors hoped to establish World Government. Others were sent, as infiltrators, into the labor organizations where they soon acquired positions of leadership. Within a few years they had abandoned the old Intercollegiate Socialist Society and had banded together with LABOR in the League for Industrial Democracy, while still working for Wall Street and spying on labor.

In December, 1918, they joined their associates in The Inquiry and trekked to Paris to be on hand when the new World Government would go into business. When the scheme failed, The Inquiry was absorbed into the newly organized Council on Foreign Relations and the labor movement spies became respectable. They abandoned the League for Industrial Democracy and turned in sufficient information to enable the Lusk Committee to raid every radical socialist and labor headquarters in New York State (June 21, 1919) and bring in wagonloads of documentary evidence. The Wolves of Wall Street had been then "made safe for democracy."

The dates of the momentous events leading to consolidation of the labor and world government movements are significant: The I. L. 0. was organized on April 11. 1919 (page 9, Lasting Peace the I. L. 0. Way), the Council on Foreign Relations on May 30, 1919 and the Lusk Committee raids June 21, 1919. Among the prominent labor leaders of our time, who are, or have been, members of the Council on Foreign Relations are: Jay Lovestone, George Meany, David MacDonald, David Dubinsky, Irving Brown, Norman Thomas and the late Lee Pressman and Sidney Hillman.

Getting back to "Lasting Peace the I. L. 0. Way," in particular the chapter headed, "The Operational Level," which contains solid study material for surplus industrial workers in the United States. The I. L. 0. HAS authority to move labor, world-wide, at its discretion. As the time table of World Empire calls for moving industrial man-power to those sections of the world where there is a shortage of skilled industrial workers, the powers of the International Labour Organization can be brought into play. It has not happened HERE yet BUT IT HAS HAPPENED.

(Page 77) 'Because man-power problems have special regional characteristics a considerable part of the programme is being carried out through field offices. . . During 1950 the migration part of the programme war expanded considerably. This was made possible when a number of the Organization's European member countries jointly provided a special $1,000,000 fund to finance a series of activities to stimulate the transfer of workers from labour surplus to labour deficient countries.

"A number of projects under this special migration programme were launched in the latter part of 1950 ...One of these projects was to develop the most satisfactory methods for classifying into broad international groupings the occupational characteristics of potential emigrants on the one hand and the occupational requirements of immigration countries on the other.

"THE AIM OF THIS PROJECT WAS TO FACILITATE THE MATCHING OF IMMIGRANTS WITH THE IMMIGRATION OPPORTUNITIES."

The I. L. 0 has no monopoly on the idea of moving labor. In his State of the Union Message of January 12, 1966, President Johnson said he will recommend legislation creating an agency to arrange that:

"Men and women can be easily assigned to jobs where they are most needed, . ."

Revolutionary Governments always get around to this.

A word to the wise INDUSTRIAL WORKER who may soon become SURPLUS: There are tens of thousands of millions of dollars of "AID" money invested in dams, roads, railroads, ports, power plants, oil drilling prospects, steel mills, etc., in the Continents of Asia and Africa. It is all ready to be used when sufficient skilled industrial labor and management can be rounded up, the United Nations operates the whole program and the I. L. O. is at the command of the U. N.

In the Grand Plan for World Empire there is absolutely no provision for UNEMPLOYMENT or RELIEF. The United Nations, under Article 55 of its Charter, guarantees FULL EMPLOYMENT worldwide. Literally volumes have been written about the status of WOMEN in worldwide employment and how the children will be cared for. Not a word is said about what the World-builders plan to do with the aged and the ill. Perhaps there will be none of either in the New World Order.


CHAPTER TEN

The U. S. Has Its Own International Law

Those devoted UN-ers who try to prove their points by reference to the United, Nations Charter—just as Constitutionalists try to prove theirs by referring to the Constitution—may properly hold that both the Constitution and, the Charter specifically prohibit some of the activities discussed here. It may not be in the Charter, but it is in the international law based largely on ratified treaties and on Resolution law. The Constitution no longer counts.

The fact is that the Constitutional Government of the United States of America, as it existed for more than one hundred and fifty years before we became involved in the United Nations, was quietly transferred to an international government. This was done without any suspicion on the part of the United States population of being so transferred. This fact simply does not register on the minds of the people. The human mind cannot grasp the enormity of such a transaction, cannot cope with it and cannot accept it as accomplished fact.

Nothing the writer might say would add much to the ability of the reader to deal with the subject and so we must rely upon the statements made by men in authority in the United Nations, as they express in their own peculiar, and deliberately confusing language, the REAL intent and purpose of the United Nations and the extent of their progress. Nothing could be more revealing in this field than statements contained in the U. N. publication: "International Law in a Changing World." A few quotations from this significant document must suffice to support the contention that the U. N. IS World Government, as was intended from the very beginning.

"The Changing World" referred to has been changed radically by close associates of those responsible for the book. The authority for the changes and the designation of those authorized to make the changes, the UN-ers hold was all in the brief and, innocuous Charter of the United Nations. The non-UN-er might be hard put to discover this authority in the Charter, but interpretation of the Charter has become the prerogative of the U. N., the governments of the world have recognized this authority and their obligation to "accept and carry out" the decree of the United Nations. This is the BASE of INTERNATIONAL LAW at this time and will remain so until the great bulk of International Law written and codified by the U. N. International Law Commission can be put into effect in Member States. The International Law Commission was set up by the General Assembly in 1947 to establish and codify World Law. They have been working on it for eighteen years. Now to get on with some of the ideas expressed, in "International Law in a Changing World":

(Page 18:) "Membership in the various organizations (of the U. N.—ed.) inevitably tend to restrict the freedom of the States, for the organizations are continually taking action in fields where only a short time ago each State exercised unchallenged authority. In fact nowadays, side by side with each of its governmental Ministries (the States?—ed.) or EACH BRANCH of a national administration, there exists an international organization or even a number of such organizations, active in the same field.

"How far, and in what way does the action of these international organizations harmonize with those of the Member States? To what extent is the free action of States limited in our time by the intervention of International Organizations?

The activities of these organizations usually take one of two forms. The first method by which an international organization penetrates into the DOMESTIC LIFE of a Sovereign State (thereby rendering it no longer sovereign—ed.), is through the CHANNEL OF THE LAW. It does so by LEGALLY BINDING ALL ITS MEMBERS TO TAKE WITHIN THEIR. OWN BORDERS STEPS AGREED UPON BY THE MAJORITY (IN THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY—ed.) as desirable to attain a certain objective."

How anybody reading and understanding the above can seriously contend that the United States has not completely surrendered its sovereignty by acceptance of such decrees as this escapes the writer. What they refer to here are the General Assembly Resolutions and the Treaties negotiated in the early days of the U. N., which serve as THE LAW of this international organization until such time as they can have the NEW INTERNATIONAL LAW prepared by the U. N. International Law Commission and accepted LEGALLY by the "Member States." This plan was revealed early in September 1965 when a former President of the American Bar Association, appearing in support of the New Law, declared that it would be presented to the United States Senate as a TREATY. He was most careful, as is the whole U. N. complex, NOT TO INDICATE THAT THE U. N. HAD ANYTHING TO DO WITH IT. It is remarkable that the U. N. Organization, which is beneficiary of such "solid support" on the part of the American people, finds it expedient to conceal so many of its most ambitious and vital operations.

The masterly understatement is standard equipment in U. N. circles. The combination of masterly understatement and far-out interpretation of the devious provisions of the Charter and whatever it was that replaced the Charter as Law of the World—a new device built upon Treaties and Resolutions of the Security and General Assembly—AT THIS TIME form the basis for the conclusions reached and expressed in "International Law in a Changing World." Continuing from Page 18:

"Among the essential functions of the United Nations and the Specified Agencies is to SECURE THE ADOPTION of a series of international conventions (agreements, treaties, etc.—ed.) coming within their respective areas of competence. . .

When an international organization can undertake the preliminary of a draft convention, can have it considered at the periodical meetings of the LEGALLY CONSTITUTED ASSEMBLIES and CAN THEN USE ITS INFLUENCE TO SECURE RATIFICATION of such a convention, the result is a VERY GREAT INCREASE in the NUMBER of such international agreements.

There are more than three thousand of them embedded in the "Law of the Land" now. And says the author:

"the fields covered by them are being continually extended."

In the brazen assertions of these paragraphs it is hoped the readers will find at least SOME BASIS for the charge that the Constitutional Government of the United States HAS BEEN USURPED and that ALL SOVEREIGNTY of the People of the United States has been erased, as quietly and unobtrusively as a child erases an error on the blackboard. The MAJORITY of U. N. delegates in the General Assembly, representing uncivilized or half-civilized and mostly illiterate and utterly incompetent people, now ADOPT A RESOLUTION which is sent down to OUR EXECUTIVE and he must put this law into effect within HIS OWN BORDERS As it was so succinctly described earlier in this section.

"The first method by which an INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION penetrates the domestic life of a SOVEREIGN STATE is through the channel of the LAW. It does so by LEGALLY BINDING ALL ITS MEMBERS TO TAKE WITHIN THEIR OWN BORDERS THE STEPS AGREED UPON BY THE MAJORITY (of the General Assembly—ed.).

Now, if you will carefully follow the revelations of the author of this U. N. publication, you can detect his belief in the power of the U. N. and its World Law to dictate legislative policies in its Member States:

"The older International Law is thus being supplanted by an EVER MORE COMPLEX NETWORK OF LEGALLY BINDING OBLIGATIONS which States (Nations—ed.) are assuming in fields where they have abandoned, no doubt FOREVER, their FORMER, COMPLETE FREEDOM OF ACTION. . . "The International organizations are thus becoming operative in areas once strictly reserved to national government, and they are doing this more and more obviously and in various ways. The historical significance of these developments will escape no one. In half a century (since the founding of the Council on Foreign Relations—ed.) the independent sovereign State, which, in the preceding centuries, had done so much to absorb political entities within its borders, has in turn been OBLIGED TO ADMIT the existence of BROADER organizations than its own (that is, the formerly independent sovereign States—ed.) TO FOLLOW THEIR INSTRUCTIONS and to SEEK THEIR ASSISTANCE and sometimes even to STAND ASIDE, and allow them, because of their own admitted INCAPACITY, to act in its place. . . "

Both of the above most potent statements were made by Mr. Roberto Ago, Member of the International Law Commission of the United Nations and former President of the World Federation of United Nations Associations. We have his word for it that international organizations, of which the U. N. is the chief, do "penetrate" into "the domestic life of a sovereign State... by legally binding all its members to take within their own borders steps agreed upon by the majority" in the General Assembly Resolutions: as a Member-Nation of the U. N. we are a Captive Nation.

The traditional notion of independence as expressed in the word sovereignty is giving way to a fresh concept. It is to be hoped that lawyers, who still think they are practicing Constitutional Law and State Legislators, who struggle to enact State Laws conforming to the Constitution of the United States, and still are bound by the restrictions imposed upon them by the New Law, as promulgated by the U. S. Supreme Court and the strange Laws now being adopted by the Congress, will RECOGNIZE THE SOURCE of these decisions and laws.

Surely, WORLD LAW and its IMPLEMENTATION within the States has never been so well set forth as in the pages of "International Law in a Changing World." By the plain statements of those who know, the law of the United States is made by Resolutions of the International Organizations, principally the Security Council and the General Assembly of the U. N. When a proper majority of the Member Nations in U. N. headquarters adopt a Resolution, that Resolution becomes LAW OF THE WORLD, and the Executive of each Member State IS OBLIGED, "notwithstanding the provisions of any other law" (U. N. Participation Act), to put that Resolution Law into effect within its borders.

Illustrative of how this works, and of the incredibly vast area now covered by the Resolution Law of the United Nations, is a Resolution adopted UNANIMOUSLY by the General Assembly December 18, 1962. Here you will find the U. N. disposing of the tax monies of all Member Nations and directing the future tax levies of the Member States. In the early paragraphs of the Resolution, it holds that the Member Nations have had no serious problems in raising taxes for war and the implements of war. The people accepted this taxation without much protest, therefore, the Member States' governments will just continue to levy these burdensome taxes AFTER THE NATIONS ARE DISARMED. They will turn the savings, resulting from disarmament, over to the United Nations for the building of the World Empire or, as they undertake the proposition, for the "development of the less-developed countries."

A U. N. release entitled "The Benefits of Disarmament" states this proposition and contains portions of the Resolution. It states that:

"Disarmament would free resources for expanding education, health protection and social insurance for slum clearance and low-cost housing (worldwide—ed.).

"According to rough United Nations estimates, as many as 150 million families in the less developed countries are in need of adequate homes. The cost for educational requirements in under-developed countries is enormous. In Africa, for instance, the total cost of the educational program (of the U. N. ed.) is expected (AFTER DISARMAMENT—ed.) to increase from $590 million to $2,600 million within twenty years."

You can see now why we are to be engaged in a Southeast Asian war for twenty years. We will stand for anything in war time, even to disarming the nation with savage wars in progress and others in immediate prospect.


CHAPTER ELEVEN

War By Resolution

In the Rhodesian situation, which is OBVIOUSLY an United Nations "mandated" war, Britain occupies a most precarious position. The nation is opposed to war with a former colony—Britain has had enough war—she wants peace. She had agreed, under the Charter and other considerations, to give up her colonies and she has been doing it as fast as possible. Now she is directed by the United Nations to take dominion over a colony, in which she has had little, if any, authority during the past forty years.

The British people and their government know that South Africa and Portugal are both under U. N. sanctions and all three (including Rhodesia) for the same reason. They refuse to turn their peaceful and prosperous countries over to Black rule and South Africa and Portugal have been taking the side of Rhodesia. A war with Rhodesia now might—and probably would—find Britain facing a three-pronged war which she could not win, certainly without a great deal of "outside" help. Britain has asserted that she will not go to war with Rhodesia and the U. N. has decreed that unless Britain can "persuade" Rhodesia to comply with the U. N. decree, she will have to subdue Rhodesia, war or no war.

While Britain is pondering this problem and gazing wistfully across the Atlantic, the United States is engaged in a strange unexplained and unexplainable war in Viet-Nam. This war will remain unexplained and unexplainable until such time as the gag is removed from Congress and the Congress is permitted to EXPLAIN THE U. N. and SEATO.

Any high-school student can tell us that the United States is in Viet-Nam in violation of a dozen sections of the U. N. Charter. The high school students have never been told about the Staff Report of the Foreign Relations Committee of the Senate, they do not fully understand U. N. interpretation and the effect of General Assembly Resolutions. They seem to have completely overlooked Article 25:

"Member Nations agree to accept and carry out the decisions of the Security Council in accordance with the present charter."

The government in Washington says that we went into the war in Viet-Nam because the government of Diem asked us to help them fight "communism." Under the Charter, we could not legally intervene in the domestic affairs of Viet-Nam under any circumstances. The whole idea of the Charter, so it is said, is to have the Security Council decide about ACTS OF AGGRESSION and what shall be done about them. Therefore, if Diem had an aggressive problem it was up to the Security Council to take up the matter and adjust it.

On the other side of the coin, we have the SEATO Treaty to which we have subscribed. This "solemn commitment" provides for ONLY ONE WAY in which one signatory nation may take military action within the boundaries of another. That is by INVITATION and for the purpose of defending against "communist aggression." Both provisions of the SEATO Treaty were met when Diem "invited" us in. It is utterly ridiculous to say that we are not in Viet-Nam under the SEATO Treaty, as are other signatory and volunteer forces of the region.

What is SEATO? It is a regional agency of the United Nations. The Charter explains in Articles 53 and 54 how regional agencies work. These articles do not SAY regional agencies are PART OF THE U. N. in their own devious language the Charter's authors say the U. N. recognizes regional agencies. Then Article 53 states:

"The Security Council shall where appropriate UTILIZE such regional arrangements or agencies for NO ENFORCEMENT action shall be taken under regional arrangements or by regional agencies WITHOUT THE AUTHORIZATION OF THE SECURITY COUNCIL" (emphasis—ed.)

The President, the Secretary of State and other officials of government have admitted that we are in Viet-Nam in accordance with our "solemn commitments" under the SEATO Treaty. Indeed we are; we could not legally be there otherwise. We are NOT violating the U. N. Charter or whatever has replaced it. The United Nations has made an inspection of the situation and found nothing wrong in our presence there. The U. N. has approved it; therefore, we are there by "AUTHORITY OF THE SECURITY COUNCIL."

Next, let us consider Article 54. (This is the one the Washington government would like to forget about.) Article 54:

"The Security Council shall at all times be kept FULLY INFORMED of all activities undertaken or IN CONTEMPLATION under regional arrangements or by regional agencies for the maintenance of international peace and security."

The head of the Security Council, by agreement, is now, always has been and always will be a RUSSIAN or other SOVIET CITIZEN. The HEAD of the Council bears the confusing title, "Under-secretary of Political and Security Council Affairs,"—the SECRETARY of ALL the Secretarial posts being U. Thant. For the purpose of this discussion, it matters little who is head of the Security Council; the Russian Suslov represents one of the FIVE PERMANENT members and it would be absurd to claim that one of the Big Five does not receive and inspect reports of field operations undertaken and CONTEMPLATED.

The same situation prevailed during the Korean War when MacArthur was complaining that the enemy was receiving his instructions before he got them. The enemy obviously knew every move the great general would make and anticipated them With ghastly consequences to more than a HUNDRED THOUSAND young Americans. Now, in the thin trickle of information we get from Viet-Nam, we can discern the same bloody red hands pulling the same strings. Here we sit, idle, rendered helpless and unable to defend and protect our own, simply because we are not told the truth.

We have in our possession a letter from the Department of State, received by a young veteran, in reply to his inquiry as to whether or not we are reporting actions undertaken and in contemplation in Viet-Nam, as required by Article 54 of the Charter. Here is the reply —names deleted for obvious reasons:

"Dear Congressman. . . .

"Thank you for your letter of September 8 concerning the question posed by . . . regarding the meeting of our obligations under Article 54 of the United Nations Charter with respect to Viet-Nam.

"The Government of the United States has informed the Security Council promptly and fully of all of our major activities in Viet-Nam. Reporting on the conflict by the press has been comprehensive and complete, obviating any necessity to inform the United Nations on a day to day basis. If I may be of any further assistance to you, please let me know.

Yours sincerely, (signed) Douglas MacArthur, II

Assistant Secretary for Congressional Relations"

The bit about the comprehensive and complete reporting of the conflict by the PRESS may be a little hard to swallow, but we become accustomed to such hokum in time.

"We" had been in Viet-Nam for one reason or another, depending on which newspaper one reads or which day it was, for nearly ten years, during which time, Congress, by their own confession, did not know what we were doing there or who had sent us there. A responsible citizenry would have been demanding that Congress find out what was going on before appropriating any more money. The uninformed People, however, did not have sufficient information to raise even this objection or to make appropriate demands upon Congress - and so we ALL just drift with the Red Tide.

The Government was running out of "explanations." They had to find some reason for the military operation in which they were engaged. Finally, on August 6th, 1964, a most providential "attack" was made against one of our cruisers. Three little "communist" PT boats actually fired shots at our giant cruiser. The affair was somewhat reminiscent of Pearl Harbor, even though we experienced no casualties. In other ways, it reminds us of Korea, where the North Koreans and Red Chinese KNEW they could shoot up our troops and the young Americans and their gallant commanders could not return the fire. There is something passing strange about the "courage" of these little nobodys shooting up the Army and Navy of the United States.

At any rate, now we had been "attacked," we had a cause to declare war on the North Vietnamese. What happened? Did the Congress declare war or did they not? You be the judge. Apparently they do not know what they did, not if we are to believe what they said.

A little State Department booklet entitled, "Viet-Nam, The Struggle For Freedom," reports on page 2:

"On August 7th (the day after the "attack" —ed.) the House of Representatives in joint resolution supported and approved the measures taken by the President to repel armed attack against U. S forces and to prevent further aggression. The resolution then added:

"The United States regards as vital to its national interest and to world peace the maintenance of international peace and security in Southeast Asia. Consonant with the Constitution of the United States and the CHARTER OF THE UNITED NATIONS and in accordance with its OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE SOUTHEAST ASIA COLLECTIVE DEFENSE TREATY (SEATO--ed.), the United States is therefore prepared as the President determines, to take all necessary steps, including the use of armed force, to assist any member or protocol State of the Southeast Asia Collective Defense Treaty requesting assistance in defense of its freedom."

By the terms of the Charter, ONLY the Security Council can authorize military action under the SEATO Treaty. The question now is, was the Congress, or such segment of the Congress as was PRESENT when this resolution was adopted, IMPLEMENTING something ordered by the Security Council or just trying to get the Administration off the hook? It might be said that this proclamation was as close as Congress can come to a declaration of war or invoking the SEATO Treaty. Whether they declare war or not, this will be a United Nations war for the simple reason that a U. N. war is the ONLY KIND of war which can be fought by a Member State. All activities undertaken, or in contemplation, will be "promptly and fully" reported to the Security Council, as affirmed by the State Department in the letter quoted above, where the Russian Suslov will have free access to them. This is the way the U. N. fights "communism," and this is what we can expect in the future as the U. N. moves inexorably to bring us to our knees in THEIR World Empire.


CHAPTER TWELVE

Which Will It Be - U. S. or U. N. ?

Other military debacles which should be attributed to the United Nations and its New York powerhouse are Cuba and the Dominican Republic. Both were well-governed and highly prosperous little countries before the propaganda machines began attacking their Presidents, building up false images of them, asserting that these rulers were cruel and ruthless dictators and calling for their elimination.

The connection between the New York Establishment and Castro, the selected candidate for the ruler of Cuba, has, from the beginning of the Cuban "revolution," been obvious to those informed about The Establishment. The New York Times and its agent, Herbert Matthews, acted openly in this situation. The publisher of the Times is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Times is second only to the Rockefellers in the number of associates represented on the roster of the C. F. R.

Not only did the Times agent, Matthews, handle the arrangements which brought Castro to power, but Castro lost no time, after he had consolidated his gains, in coming to the United States, where he reported in at headquarters, Pratt House, home office of the C. F. R. in New York. Their annual report for that year records that Castro addressed the Council.

Incredulous people always point out that the billionaires of the Council on Foreign Relations OWNED enormous business interests in Cuba. This is true, but CUBANS had been acquiring very substantial holdings in some of the more profitable operations. The cartelists of the C. F. R. are never satisfied to own MOST of anything; they insist upon having it ALL, as they will when the United Nations has completed the establishment of the World Empire.

Then there was the case of the Dominican Republic. This little country had been the poor house of the Western Hemisphere. It had never been able to maintain a stable government. Its plight had been deplorable. Finally the United States decided that something should be done to establish a working government and we sent in the Marines to try to get things moving. The Marines, as usual, did a magnificent job. They brought the country to a state of sovereignty and solvency; they put it, in good shape.

Among the Marine troops was a young man named Rafael Trujillo Molina. When the Marines left, the Republic was in the hands of an elected ruler. He, it turned out, was not able to preserve the gains made by the Marine Corps and the economy of the country began to crack. This ruler was obliged to borrow large sums of money and the country was soon back to the same condition from which it had been rescued.

As the date for elections drew near, Trujillo decided to run for the office of President. He had become convinced that the rule imposed by the Marines was the ONLY form of government which would survive in the Dominican Republic and he told the people plainly that if he were elected he would govern by military law. He was elected and he promptly re-instated the methods of the Marines.

The country prospered as no other country had done since the colonial days of the American Republic. Within ten years ALL external debt had been paid, the whole nation was being educated, whether or not they wanted it. There was an abundance of work to be done and Trujillo saw to it that the Dominicans exerted themselves fully to get it done and they reaped un-dreamed of rewards from their labors. At the time of the assassination of Trujillo, the Dominican Republic was on 100% gold standard with a treasury surplus. Nowhere on earth was there such "peace and security" as in the Dominican Republic. Did the U. S. and the U. N. approve of this? The record says "NO." Outside agitation, led by the propaganda machines of New York City, began a systematic campaign to bring down the government of the Dominican Republic. The cry here—as in the Cuban affair—was that Trujillo refused to hold "democratic" elections and the campaign continued until Trujillo was assassinated.

Now the two most prosperous and civilized little nations in this hemisphere have been reduced to chaos and dire poverty. Their streets have run rivers of blood; the people live in a constant state of terror; there is no stability anywhere. The Establishment and their revolutionary government in Washington are happy. Two more nations have been pushed behind the "Iron Curtain" and the Western Hemisphere has been breached. The "profound" revolution was expanding; the "one man, one vote" gimmick was taking hold.

The spirit of Trujillo was still abroad in the Dominican Republic, however. Another military man, Wessin y Wessin, was in the process of leading the country back to peace and order. Then the Washington Government went after him—literally. They ousted him, drove him out of the country and began a new reign of terror calculated to compel the Dominicans to accept a form of government dictated by Washington.

Now, under the United, Nations Charter, of course, "We" have no business in the Dominican Republic EXCEPT UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE SECURITY COUNCIL. "We" were careful to call upon the Organization of American States a regional agency (as SEATO is a regional agency) of the U. N., which may operate ONLY UNDER THE AUTHORITY of the Security Council. The hand of the United Nations, in these wars, is being carefully concealed, but sometimes in the official conclaves, in headquarters and elsewhere, a hint of the REAL situation comes out.

Within the United States the sham-battle is standard equipment. From time to time the Members put on a show for the benefit of the press and the public. Such a sham-battle was staged during the heat of the Dominican outbreak, with the Czech charging the United States with Charter violations in the matter of intervention in the Dominican Republic. Mr. Francis T. P. Plimpton (former law partner of Adlai Stevenson), an American delegate to the U. N., replied (U. N. Monthly Chronicle, July 1965, pg. 34) that:

"The Organization of the American States did not need his defense. In accordance with Article 53 of the Charter it had REPORTED ALL ITS ACTIONS TO THE SECURITY COUNCIL."

As the 0. A. S. reported its actions to the Security Council, we must assume the actions taken were satisfactory to the Security Council, otherwise the Security Council, under ITS OBLIGATIONS under the Charter, would have been required to make a change. The Security Council had both the authority and the power to CONTROL the situation in the Dominican Republic. We may safely presume that IT DID and DOES. The Abominable situation in the Dominican Republic is a U. N. affair. It cannot be anything else. If it were, it would be the obligation of the U. N. to stop it.

In the Cuban affair we had an excellent example of U. N. control of a situation that was clearly a "threat to the peace." The Cuban affair also had been referred to the O. A. S., and for once the O. A. S. countries had reached an agreement. They were prepared to handle Castro. The U. N. promptly snatched the whole matter from the 0. A. S. the Security Council took it up and sent U Thant and a group of "experts" to Cuba. Mr. Thant ordered the removal of the American air power, he called off the blockade by American ships and he, Mr. U Thant in person, put the U. N. STAMP OF APPROVAL on what now exists in Cuba. The government now in control of Cuba is what the U. N. wants in Cuba and all over the world. Cuba is now firmly incorporated in the World Empire of the Establishment. It is "Behind the Iron Curtain."

The government propaganda line which "explains" why we permit the continuance of the Castro regime in Cuba has been that we are afraid to antagonize Red China. If we do not coddle Red China, we might bring on a nuclear holocaust. The same "line" was pushed during the Korean War.

An intelligent and aroused People will begin to reject the propaganda "lines" advanced by spokesmen for the Revolutionary Government who speak only under the Discipline of the United Nations and/or its C. F. R. proprietors. The People will learn how to read and understand the devious language of The New Order and to judge the proposals for what they really are, to use common sense, 4th grade arithmetic and solid self-interest in the process.

The Washington government has become conscious of an awakening at the grassroots and in the State Capitols. States are being asked to take action to protect the interests of the People. In an effort to head off any inquiry into Federal and international affairs, the Revolutionary Government proposes to "beat them to it." The President, in his State of the Union Message, has promised to appoint a commission of "the most distinguished scholars and men of public affairs, to examine our Federal System, to examine the relation between city, state, nation and citizen." For thirty years the country has been plagued with Committees and Commissions of "distinguished citizens" who always come from the same hatchery, the Council on Foreign Relations. They "find" what the government wants them to "find" and the States and the People are pushed a few more paces into the World Empire. There can be no doubt of the urgent need for examination of the Federal System. The States and the People should assume this responsibility, not the Masters of the present Federal System.

The President's State of the Union Message, January 12, 1966, contained some statements deliberately calculated to deceive and mislead the People. From this we can see how the People have been duped into surrendering their earnings and being burdened with debt while Foreign Aid (to billionaire cartelists) money was spent for Empire Building all over the world. These sentences are LOADED—read them carefully.

"We will place the maximum skill and resources of America in farming (the skills—ed.) and in fertilizers (the resources—ed.) at the service of those countries committed to developing a modern agriculture."

This crack about pledging the resources of America has been said before, even more emphatically, by the top men in government since the day the U. N. Charter was adopted.

Under the Constitutional Government of the United States, the President had no power or authority to pledge American men or resources to ANYBODY ON EARTH. Men were masters of their own destiny, except in time of war, and the resources of the nation belonged to the owners. All this changed under the Revolutionary Government of the New World Order.

The point should be made—and remembered--that at no time have the real purposes, for which "Foreign Aid" money was appropriated, been explained to the Congress or the People. The enormous "Foreign Aid' budget of from 3 to 4 BILLION dollars is explained by the President in these words:

"We will conduct a worldwide attack on the problems of hunger, disease and ignorance. . . place the matchless skill and resources of America at the service of those countries committed to developing a modern agriculture, aid those who educate the young."

"We" will do this IN FACT by building hard top roads, railroads—tens of thousands of miles of them--paper mills, radio factories, power plants, dams, ports, steel mills and more. This is the type of deception which the Revolutionary Government finds it necessary to practice in order to persuade the deluded and defrauded People to share their earnings with the Empire Builders of the United Nations. The "Foreign Aid" money is NOT used for eradicating hunger, disease and illiteracy. Funds actually used for these purposes come from the budgets of such agencies as UNESCO, International Labour and World Wealth Organizations and other specialized agencies. The Revolutionary Government has NEVER told the People the truth about "Foreign Aid" and A is not telling them the truth now.

Truth, independence and justice have been abandoned as the Washington Government surrendered to United Nations laws and decrees. Even the lives and security of the people in the States are in jeopardy. We are now subject to the infamous Nuremberg ex post facto law. The United States Senate adopted the Nuremberg Treaty as required by the United Nations. Now Americans may be tried on criminal charges for actions which were perfectly legal at the time they were committed. Fantastic—outrageous? The U. N. itself is all that and more.

It is the hope of the writer and this revelation of the little-understood FACTS about the United Nations will arouse the American public to TAKE ACTION in the ONLY WAY action can be taken effectively. We must realize that there is no hope whatever for us or our young men in the armed services anywhere in Washington. Washington has SOLD OUT to the Empire-Builders in the United Nations. They have delivered this Nation up to World Government and do not recognize their own authority conferred upon them by the STATES. They are merely puppets for the United Nations and serve only to IMPLEMENT the decisions of the U. N. agencies.

We might retire many of them, even a majority of them, at the next election. That would not quite solve the problem; it would help, but far more drastic action is needed. Let us review AMERICAN history. The way to this problem will be found in the ORIGINAL CONSTITUTION and the Bill of Rights.

When the States formed the Federal Agency—that is what it was, simply an Agency of the States to do certain things requiring the services of an agency—they granted VERY LIMITED and clearly defined powers to this Federal Agency. All powers not specifically delegated were retained to the States and the People.

The People would elect the Congress and the Congress would represent the People. The States would elect (appoint) the Senate and the Senate would represent the States. In that way the States, which are close to the People and responsible to them, had CONTROL over the Senate which was to represent them.

Our troubles began when the first propagandists went to work in 1911 to persuade the States that the People were demanding the right to elect the Senators themselves. This, the propagandists declared, was the "democratic process." The States succumbed to the propaganda, although there was not a word of truth in it, and enacted the 17th Amendment which created TWO HOUSES OF REPRESENTATIVES and left the States with NO REPRESENTATTON in the Federal Government. Now the AGENCY has become a powerful and undisciplined GOVERNMENT.

The States have absolutely no control over it, simply because the States no longer appoint the Senators who are presumed to represent them. Enormous slush funds, donated by greedy and selfish people who sought to obtain advantage for themselves, poured into the States to influence the Senatorial elections. The Senators so elected could not long remain undisciplined. They were soon under the domination of the New York Establishment and when the Establishment set up the United Nations, the whole government accepted the DISCIPLINE of the United Nations.

It is of the opinion of the writer that the SHORTEST road to freedom and a return to Constitutional Government is by REPEAL of the 17th Amendment. This would bring home every member of the United States Senate and permit the States to appoint men who would truly REPRESENT THE STATES. They might return the incumbents if they so desired, but the STATES and NOT the United Nations or the Council on Foreign Relations, would, control them.

The laws of the United States have become such a confused muddle that it is probable that only a Constitutional Convention would be equal to the appalling task of bringing order out of the prevailing chaos. As this is written, a substantial number of the States have adopted identical resolutions calling for a Constitutional Convention. A long educational campaign for the information and education of State Representatives has brought to the States the best-informed State Representatives of the century.

The tremendous events of the past few years have established a TIME FOR ACTION in the States. That time is NOW. The wars in Viet-Nam and in the Dominican Republic, both under Security Council authority and the promise of MORE and ever MORE wars under the same authority, have brought the apathy and patience of the American people to an end.

The blatant and obvious lies of the Administration and both Houses of Congress, the muzzling of press and military, the outrageous and tyrannical decisions of a Supreme Court run wild, the spread of Soviet Empire throughout the world, the bankrupting of States and People—all these coming to a head at the same time—indicate that the TIME IS RIGHT to rise up and call a halt to the DISCIPLINE of the United Nations. It may be that this evil thing will destroy itself.

Let's give it a shove.

THE END

 

Annex

Even as this tract was being written, a strong forward surge in empire building was being promulgated by the back-stage directors of the United Nations. You have noted that the provision of the U. N. Charter for review and revision of the Charter in 1955, if it had not been done before, became MANDATORY under Article 109 and has been steadily ignored by the U. S. They have been unable to comply with this provision, because any amendment or revision of the Charter would have to be presented to a United States Senate, far more fully informed about U. N. charters than the Senate of 1945.

The situation in the U. N. now, even after the prestige conferred upon it by the visit of the Pope, is so charged with illegality and outright criminality that they need to do something about a CHARTER, a CONSTITUTION or some semblance of law and authority for what they are doing. They have had agencies working on plans and schemes to rectify these defects and, as you have learned, there have been some tragic failures. The inability to get the new International Law presented to an unsuspecting Senate was a significant case in point. The law for the international currency was incorporated in the new International Law. As it stands now, no International Law, no International Currency, but they will continue to work on it.

For nearly ten years two United World Federalists, high in the World Empire-building scheme, Grenville Clark and Harvard professor Louis B. Sohn, have been working on a NEW CHARTER. They call it a "revised" charter and their work on it has been completed. They have launched the program in a book, "World Peace Through World Law," and it has been getting tremendous reception among supporters of World Empire, worldwide.

The NEW CHARTER will have to make the grade through a Senate already bruised by the revelations of the substance of the Old Charter, which they have consistently refused to revise or consider in relation to the interests of the United States. The World Federalists appreciate the dilemma of the Senate. They have come up with a scheme to have the nation's "free" press (see last page) initiate a propaganda blitz on the American public to persuade them to create an IRRESISTIBLE DEMAND for what they are billing as a "Conference for Charter Revision."

The obvious fact is, under Article 109, they do not need a propagandized Conference to review, revise or amend the Charter. It was required that they do this in 1955 and every year since that time. All they have to do to get a LEGAL Conference to revise the Charter is to bring up a resolution in the General Assembly and go to work on it. The document sent to 1800 of the nation's top newspapers sets forth some hint of what they hope to accomplish by the proposed "revision" of the Charter. This program will require a propaganda barrage the like of which has never been seen or heard before.

Some of the proposed "revisions" set forth in the news release indicate that what the U. N. has in mind is the NEW REVISED CHARTER of Clark and Sohn. The masterpiece of Hiss and Pasvolsky becomes a constitutional gem by comparison with the Clark-Sohn charter. These are some of the proposals submitted to the nation's press; they are all incorporated in the Clark-Sohn New Revised Charter:

"A permanent U. N. peace force to maintain international peace;

"A General Assembly EMPOWERED TO ADOPT BINDING RULES AND REGULATIONS;

"A revised voting system appropriate to the strengthened U. N. and implementing the Disarmament plan. Abolition of the present VETO POWER in the Security Council;

A system of courts (world courts—ed.) to decide issues; A WORLD DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM requiring that the WORLD (?—ed.) use a substantially larger share of its resources to promote the economic and social advancement of the less-developed nations;

"A reliable and adequate revenue system."

BINDING RULES AND REGULATIONS ARE LAWS. As Mr. Roberto Ago of the International Law Commission stated it: the U. N. controls its states by LEGALLY BINDING them to accept the decisions of the majority (in the General Assembly). What the U. N. is after here, is to LEGALIZE the utterly illegal resolutions and laws of the past ten years and to have the people exert IRRESISTIBLE pressure on the Senate to compel the Senate to LEGALIZE the BINDING AUTHORITY conferred upon the General Assembly itself.

They have been operating and running the world for the past ten years by these illegal General Assembly resolutions. Now that the people and the State Officials are learning of the resolution racket, the U. N. will try propaganda to enable them to get public support for what they offer as a "Charter Review Conference."

There is entirely too much of the Clark and Sohn New Revised Charter apparent in the U. N. suggestions here quoted to ignore the activities of Clark and Sohn in this field. These planned "revisions" are the work of these two high-ranking World Federalists. Their mouthpiece is James P. Warburg who stated, to a committee of the Senate, that WE would have World Government whether or not we wanted it: if we did not get it by CONSENT, we would get it by CONQUEST. These men know whereof they speak. The head of the organization was Elmo Roper who proclaimed that "OUR GOAL IS GOVERNMENT OF ALL THE WORLD." We discount the pronouncements of these men at our own peril and at the risk of the loss of our liberties, liberties GUARANTEED by the Constitution which will be forever ERASED by the New Revised Charter.

Consider the item dealing in circumspect terms with a "reliable and adequate revenue system." As Clark and Sohn express the "adequate revenue system" it will provide for the levy of DIRECT TAXES by the U. N. against the people of the Member Nations and for the establishment of an U. N. Internal Revenue Service with collection depots for collecting the revenue. From the Annex of "World Peace Through World Law":

"Provision would be made for the establishment in each Member Nation of a United Nations Fiscal Office the functions of which would be to receive the taxes of those in that nation who under national laws enacted for the purpose (under General Assembly law—ed.) have been made liable to pay taxes to the United Nations and (c) to transmit the sums so received to the central treasury of the United Nations.

"(5) All Member Nations would undertake to place their tax collecting machinery at the disposal of the United Nations, for collecting U. N. levied taxes."

With regard to the United Nations COURT SYSTEM, Clark and Sohn suggest "suggestions" incorporated in the proposed propaganda blitz about which the nation's lawyers would presumably know nothing, such "revisions" as these:

"In respect to the enforcement of United Nations LAW, it is proposed to establish a system of, United Nations Regional courts subordinate to the International Court of Justice, in order to provide adequate machinery for dealing with offenses against the Charter or LAWS of the United Nations. . .

"ENFORCEMENT OF UNITED NATIONS LAWS. Along with the machinery for dealing with international disputes, it is intended through a proposed system of United Nations Regional Courts, to afford effective tribunals throughout the world for the INTERPRETATION and application of the Charter, of the laws and regulations of the United Nations in respect to disarmament, and of the other provisions of the prevention of war. . . "

The Clark-Sohn Plan requires not only the abolition of the VETO in the Security Council itself. It would be replaced with an EXECUTIVE COUNCIL under DIRECTION and AUTHORITY of the General Assembly.

In revising Article 25 it is provided that:

"The Member Nations agree to ACCEPT AND CARRY OUT the decision of the Executive Council, subject ONLY to the right to contest the validity of any such decisions by appeal to the (U. N----ed.) International Court of Justice. . . "

To NAIL THIS DOWN, Article 1.03 provides:

"The revised charter and the LAWS and REGULATIONS of the United Nations which shall be made in pursuance thereof shall be the SUPREME LAW of the United Nations and ALL AUTHORITIES of the Member Nations SHALL BE BOUND THEREBY, anything in the CONSTITUTION OR LAWS OF ANY MEMBER NATION TO THE CONTRARY NOTWITHSTANDING."

Comment by Clark and Sohn:

". . . In harmony with this conception, paragraph 2 makes definite the obligation of 'all authorities' of the member Nations to be bound by the revised Charter and the laws and regulations enacted thereunder. It follows that when necessary the constitutions of member Nations would need to be revised so as to accord with this provision."

It can't happen here? If the plans of the United World Federalists, the United Nations, and the Government in Washington can be protected from public scrutiny, it will have happened here. It actually has happened here. It is only by Divine dispensation that the U. N. has decided to LEGALIZE the performances of the past ten years and to persuade the propaganda-drugged population to apply IRRESISTLBLE pressures on the U. S. Senate to VOTE US INTO THE WORLD GOVERNMENT LEGALLY, that WE, the People, have received this period of grace in which we may counteract this propaganda and lead the way back to a Constitutional Government.

As a hint of what MIGHT happen, the Clark and Sohn New Revised Charter should serve as a guide to the wary.

The Dallas Conspiracy

 

 

[Front Cover, Dallas Conspiracy, by Nord Davis Jr.]

Dallas Conspiracy

By Nord Davis, Jr.

 

 

 

[This document is a republication of the 1992 edition, which was the last edition published by Nord Davis, Jr.  It has been updated with comments and new material by Pastor Eli James, in the year 2010.  Original graphics reproduced where possible.   All comments by me will be enclosed in [brackets].  Footnotes will be placed at the end of each Chapter.  And now, Mr. Nord Davis, Jr.:]

Foreword

This is a reprint of a pamphlet I published twenty-four years ago when the trail of the murder in Dallas was still warm.  A conspiracy is a combination of two or more persons with the intent to commit an unlawful act.  With the renewed interest in this most highly publicized murder in American history through the movie JFK, it was decided to reprint the truth as I studied it for the two years between 1966 to 1968 and set my findings forth as I did then, letting the chips fall where they may.  I will be presenting an entirely different version than the dozen or more that have been published before.  Since my first edition hit the streets in August, 1968, I have read many of the later theoretical solutions to this murder, including the 625 page book, Crossfire, by Jim Marrs, the basis of Oliver Stone’s movie JFK.  I still stand by what was written years ago.  I can assure the reader that one does not need 625 pages to solve this murder! The reader is only asked to read the evidence presented and make up his own mind about what happened in Dallas, Texas on November 22 1963. We will not debate the issue further with anyone. We are not interested in radio talk shows, television appearances or public speaking engagements on the data contained herein.

My Humble Dedication

This pamphlet is dedicated to the one far-sighted man, the late Raymond LaBombarde, American Patriot and Industrialist, of Nashua, New Hampshire.  It was through his financial help and personal encouragement, extended to me years ago, that kept my publications going and made our two years of exhaustive research for this publication financially possible.  Well done, good and faithful servant.

Reproduction Encouraged

This pamphlet is not copyrighted.  Anyone is free to publish his own pamphlets or newsletter, containing our research, with or without credits to the author.  Americans who wish to republish this pamphlet in quantity for distribution in your home area will be sent high-quality masters prepared for off-set webb printing for the price of $20.00.   All we ask is that you respect the common law rights to our work and not alter its contents in any way except to include your local address as to where additional copies can be obtained. This would be a good fund-raising project for your church, club or organization.

[Obviously, this offer is no longer valid.  Since Nord Davis and I occasionally talked on the telephone to discuss and debate Scripture, I don’t think Nord will object, from his place in heaven, to what I have added.  All of my additions will be duly noted.  I know that Nord Davis had only one objective in mind: to get the TRUTH about the JFK assassination to the public.  New information has come to me, which will help to pinpoint the conspirators. – Pastor Eli James.]

PARDON ME but… Is a free Christian patriotic newsletter which is sent to anyone upon written request.   Donations are encouraged and used to expand our circulation.  This is our 28th year of publication.  This publication is supported entirely today by The Northpoint Teams, a dedicated group of Christian patriots and are the ones who make these publications possible.  Single copies of this issue are $2.00 post-paid.  50 copies are $25.00 + $5.00 postage.  100 copies are $40.00 + $10.00 postage and handling. Write to us for this and other publications at Northpoint Teams, P0 Box 129 Topton North Carolina 28781.

First Printing August 1968 Second Printing November 1969 Third Printing November, 1971 Fourth Printing November 1977 Fifth Printing April, 1992

[All of this reprint information is obsolete.  I reproduce it here to provide a complete text version of Nord Davis’ publication, as it appeared in April 1992.  Norwood William Davis, Jr. died on September 15, 1997. - Eli]

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

A conspiracy is rarely, if ever, proved by positive testimony.  When a crime of high magnitude is about to be perpetrated by a combination of individuals, they do not act openly, but covertly and secretly.  The purpose formed is known only to those who enter into it. Unless one of the conspirators betray his companions and give evidence against them, their guilt can only be proved by circumstantial evidence.

It is said by some writers on evidence that such circumstances are stronger than positive proof.  A witness swearing positively, it is said, may misapprehend the facts or swear falsely, but that circumstances do not lie.

-Special Judge Advocate John A. Bingham. Washington. D.C. 1865.  During the trial of the Lincoln Assassination Conspirators

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Almost 29 years ago, a middle- aged man riding beside a very lovely lady in a Presidential automobile, was shot and instantly killed on Elm Street in Dallas, Texas.

Because of the avalanche of data and speculation now in print, it may be concluded that this is very probably the most famous murder in American history.  In spite of errors in both logic and physics, most Americans believe that they have a pretty good idea how it all happened.  Few, if asked, can advance any logical motive for the murder.   Most are satisfied to dismiss it with a simple shrug of the shoulders.

Surprisingly, almost every account of the event, from the now highly suspect Warren Commission Report, down to the most obscure speculator in print, contains enough of these obvious errors and contradictions to discredit the work and open to question either the motives or the ability of the author.  This, quite frankly, includes Oliver Stone, and his movie JFK.

Unlike most such Kennedy assassination authors, I pretend neither unfathomable wisdom nor special political sophistication.  I do not claim privileged inside information, as does Manchester.  I do not command the exhaustive resources of investigative agencies.  All I have had is hours of hard, exhausting work.  I am not, however, quite as gullible as the Warren Commission presumes most Americans to be.  I simply believe that you will find this pamphlet to be thought-provoking, not because its implications can in any way help the man who now lies buried in Arlington, but because it will cast a spotlight upon the evil influences which now control the government of the United States.  Those subversive influences have only increased in the years since the tragic event in Dallas, Texas in November, 1963. - Nord Davis, Jr., April, 1992

 

PARDON ME, but... #2

 

Julius Caesar, Act III, Scene 1

And Brutus said:

Stoop, Romans, Stoop

And let us bathe our hands

In Caesar’s blood.

Up to the elbows, and besmear

Our swords:

Then walk we forth, even to the

Market place,

And waving our red weapons o’er our heads,

Let’s all cry “Peace, freedom and Liberty!”

And Cassius added,

Stoop, then, and wash. How many Ages hence

Shall our lofty scene be acted

Over

In States unborn and accents yet Unknown!

-Shakespeare

 

 

Let’s remember that revolutions do not always establish freedom.”

-President Fillmore.

 

Chapter 1

Minutes after the Dallas murder, the Chief Justice of the United States Supreme Court issued a curious statement:

“. . .A great and good President suffered martyrdom as a result of the hatred and bitterness that (had) been infected into the life of our nation by bigots.”

Even after twenty-eight years, those old enough to remember that event will recall Earl Warren’s famous statement.  I am not concerned right now as to whether the Chief Justice intended to refer to the actual assassin, or to the “climate” which may have motivated the assassin.  Bigot, in the lexicon of the Far Left, the communists and totalitarian socialists, who live among us, means anyone who is a “patriot” or, God forbid, an “anti-communist.”  They have seldom used it in any other context.  Well, no sooner had the Chief Justice issued that unfounded, premature statement, that the communist Lee Harvey Oswald was captured.  How could he have expected that turn of events?

Earl Warren was on the spot! The only person captured anywhere near the scene of the murder was a communist, not, one presumes, a ‘bigot.” Trapped in an awkward situation such as this, and long before any evidence whatever had been unearthed, Warren’s flexible mind came up with what was to be the final answer: Lee Harvey Oswald has acted alone. *

You must try to grasp the proper perspective.  Here was communist Oswald who had renounced his American citizenship and gone to live in the Soviet Union.  Few Americans have given up their citizenship, but how many have you ever heard of that were accepted from America into the Soviet Union?  Unusual, to say the very least. Oswald happened to choose to live in Minsk, the same city, as mere chance would have it, where the Soviet Secret Police, Unit 13, maintains their school for assassins.  The JFK movie authors managed to overlook that point.  While there, young romantic Oswald fell in love and married a Soviet national, a girl who just happened to live with her uncle, a Colonel in the Soviet KGB. Some time later, communist Oswald, now a family man with one child, left the Soviet Union bound for America.  Here is a communist who is no longer an American citizen by his personal choice, permitted to come here and bring two Soviet nationals, his wife and child, along with him.  Have you ever heard of any other two Soviet citizens who have been so fortunate back in those days?

God grants liberty only to those

who love it and are always ready to guard and

defend it.’

Daniel Webster

Oswald’s repatriation and the special visas for his wife and daughter were arranged for him by the US Embassy in Moscow. Where did Oswald get the money for such an expensive trip?  The Warren Hearings revealed that his trip, and some future monetary needs, were provided by a special State Department loan, personally cleared by the Secretary of State Dean Rusk.  Dean Rusk, for you younger readers, had always been in the Marxist movements around the world since the days he served in China in what would later become the CIA.  Rusk, according to the House Committee on UnAmerican Activities, Appendix Part 9, identifies Dean Rusk as a Director of the Communist Front known as the “Institute for Pacific Relations.”  As you will see, this background information is key to understanding the Dallas murder and those involved in it as a conspiracy.

Anyway, the record shows that this lone assassin managed to travel here and there about America with no means of support anywhere close to the amount of money he was spending.  One might expect that this man with his “progressive” background might settle near Harvard or Columbia where he would find companionship among others of his own leftist thinking and degenerate kind.  Instead, of all places, communist Oswald decided to settle in Dallas, a city well-known for its high proportion of patriotic, anti-communist Americans.  Luckily, the communist Oswald managed to secure a low income job in a building overlooking the President’s route, several weeks before that route had even been made public.  How in the world did he know exactly where he was supposed to be?  No one seems to want to ask that question, though, as Oliver Stone’s movie points out, it is no longer unusual for people to arrive at some kind of conspiracy theory.

Communist Oswald had gone through basic training with the US Marine Corps.  Although not the best of Marines, he was at least familiar with military rifles and their use. Yet, instead of buying a rifle with which he was familiar through Marine Corps training, the record shows that he bought a mail order carbine, a short barrel, inaccurate weapon designed primarily for close combat situations.  Knowing that this weapon could not be carried with him on his flight from the Texas Book Depository, he certainly would have assumed that the weapon would be found, no matter how carefully he might hide it.  That being true, wouldn’t you think he would have known that it would be quickly traced to him?   Why would anyone make that serious mistake, unless they did so on purpose?  [Or unless someone else placed this weapon by the window up on the sixth floor of the Book Depository. – Eli.]

Imagine this situation from the Warren Commission Theory.  Suppose you are communist Oswald.  You are going to do the most important job in your life – murder the President of the United States.  You will have only one chance, a long shot from the fifth floor of a building overlooking his motorcade.  You go to a sports catalog in search of a weapon.  In Kleins Sporting Goods advertisement, offering a wide selection of quality firearms, you select an internationally known piece of junk, a vintage 6.5 mm Mannlicher Carcano Italian carbine that costs $12.00!  Come on, be realistic!  No one is that much of a fool!  Oswald had to have known that this weapon would not be up to doing the job of killing the President from that range and that it would certainly be found and traced directly to him.   Oliver Stone makes almost the same assumption and proves from this that there had to have been someone else doing some of the shooting.  I once owned one of these Mannlicher Carcano carbines.  It has a clumsy, long stroke, bolt action that would be especially awkward for any left-hander.   Oswald was left-handed.  Apparently, he figured himself such a crack shot that he took only four bullets with him.  No more were ever found.  Unfortunately for the Warren Theory, this weapon has a very unusual tin “clip” such that the weapon cannot be loaded unless there are six available rounds to hold themselves together in the clip prior to loading!  If he missed his target with these four bullets, he would still expect to serve a life term for attempted murder.  Should he kill his target and be captured, he could expect to be executed under Texas law.  Certainly he could not expect to get away with it, not with a mail-order weapon left behind that would be traceable to him.  Even the odds of just escaping from the Book Depository might seem very high.  The Warren Commission would have us believe that communist Oswald took all this risk with a carbine and scope having a combined value of less than $20.

 

 

If I were ever thinking of taking a pot-shot at the President, I would have purchased a very common modern rifle through a private sale and with cash I would have selected a semi-automatic sniper rifle capable of putting out many bullets in a very short time.   My selection would have been the same one that Lee Harvey Oswald trained with as a Marine, the US M-1 Garand.  As it happens, I took my Navy basic training with this weapon and own one in very fine condition complete with bayonet.  It is a gift from a Northpoint Team member who knew that I have wanted one for years.  As you will notice, that M-1 Garand rifle is advertised right above the Italian carbine in the very Klein ad that US News & World Report says that Oswald had ordered from!  I wish I could find one of these today for only $90!  Then I would have ground off all the identifying serial numbers in an effort to at least try to protect myself.   I am not into martyrdom.  Now doesn’t that make more sense than the actions taken by Mr. Oswald? Of course.

The question I have tried to answer in this pamphlet is this: Was communist Oswald stupid, or did he have a far different role to play in the Dallas Conspiracy?   Could his role have been that of a decoy -- a man who could be rather easily captured so that the real triggerman could get away?  Would a family man put himself into this predicament if he were not certain that he could be proven innocent in a court of law?  This and similar speculations did not deter an adamant Chief Justice from concluding: Lone assassin; no conspiracy.

Oswald Shot by Ruby

Photograph by Robert H. Jackson

 

 

 

 

Oswald, according to the Warren Commission, acted alone.  He did what he did because of a “climate of bigotry” found in Dallas.  It would not be acceptable to have the murder be any part of a communist conspiracy.  Haven’t the communists and their friends, such as Earl Warren and George Bush, been insisting for forty years that no such conspiracy exists?  If gullible Americans were to learn that their beloved President had been murdered as part of some communist conspiracy, they might insist that their government stop trade and financial aid to communist dictators.  They might demand that communist speakers be barred from college campuses and that the communist leadership in urban riots be made public.  You would have to have lived in those times of the mid-60’s to understand this problem faced by the Warren Commission.  Oliver Stone and others need to stop trying to force the solution to the murder in Dallas out of the social and political context of that unusual era.  If the American people had ever found out that a communist had been a party to this murder, they might have triggered another round of “McCarthyism.”  Americans might demand a Congressional investigation of the communist penetration into high levels of the Federal Government, especially in the State Department.  This we know: the Warren Commission did not want that to happen.  Nor, as further disclosures in this pamphlet will reveal, neither did they want the involvement of American CIA intelligence operatives known either.  Thus the only alternative -- logic, physics, and physical evidence to the contrary -- “Lee Harvey Oswald acted alone.”

As the long arm of coincidence would have it, somehow another “lone assassin” managed to get through the tight security at the Dallas police station at just the right moment to be filmed on nationwide TV. Thus, everyone in America could see first hand how the first “lone assassin” has been killed.  No conspiracy could have done a better job of eliminating the chief suspect before he could talk.  By these strange coincidences, at least, Oliver Stone’s movie, JFK, has proven beyond any shadow of doubt, that a conspiracy to murder the President was in operation in Dallas on November 22, 1963.  As Stone and others point out, if Oswald was not just a “lone assassin” then there are others still free and the case is not closed.  Logically, if Oswald acted alone, and then Ruby killed him acting alone, which the Warren Commission says they did, why should there be any point to the Commission withholding this vital data from the American public for seventy-five years? Who are they protecting, and why?

I think that by the time you have studied this issue of PARDON ME, but…, you will have an answer.  It is my answer.  I acknowledge help in the solution to this crime from some incredible and unusual places.  I can now acknowledge, since the man is now deceased, that I had some moon-light criminology help from a top detective in the Massachusetts State Police and their crime labs as to the evidence regarding foreshortening of telephoto lenses, etc., critical to my solution.  I believe that you will be convinced that Oswald did not act alone but as part of a well-drilled team.  I believe that anyone of average intelligence will soon conclude that a conspiracy existed, involving both communist and government-employed individuals to carry out the murder of the President of the United States.  I think that I can establish that another conspiracy existed within the Warren Commission to cover up important details, to fail to question important witnesses, and to deliberately alter vital photographs causing them to be printed as authentic in Life Magazine and other publications.  I will show that this was done in an effort to keep from the public the very identity of the actual murderer, who at the time of the conclusion of the Warren Commission Hearings, had not been arrested.  Finally, I hope to demonstrate that these two conspiracies are, in fact of law, very closely related.  The fact is, as we have found out twenty years after our initial publication of this pamphlet, they are one and the same.

______________________________________________________________________

*This new idea of a “lone assassin” theory, which worked so well in the Dallas murder, was to become the “norm” for political murders, and attempted murders, over the next few decades.  First was Jack Ruby, who was the lone assassin a Lee Harvey Oswald. Martin Luther King, they say, was murdered by a “lone gunman,” James Earl Ray, and although he has never had a trial, he has been in prison for twenty years.  Then, there was Sirhan Sirhan, who they tell us “acted alone” in the murder of Robert Kennedy, soon after he had won the Democratic nomination for President.  Later, there was the “lone assassin” Hinckley, who shot and wounded President Reagan.

 

Chapter Two

When one accuses the Warren Commission in print of a conspiracy to falsify the evidence to which it had been entrusted, he must be able to prove it.  I am now prepared to do just that, though you must appreciate that in so few pages I am not going to be able to exhaust every detail of every point discussed.  I must hold some trump cards in this case to insure my own personal safety.

It must be remembered that the Warren Report was the conclusion of the Warren Commission, alleged to have been based upon the evidence which they uncovered during the Hearings.  The complete text of these Hearings fills 26 volumes of testimony by hundreds of witnesses.  Furthermore, the Warren Report was the unanimous conclusion of all members of this bi-partisan panel. There were no dissenting opinions, which, in itself, is rather unique.  It should also be remembered that the Congress, the Senate, the FBI, the CIA, and the Secret Service already had professional investigative agencies established.  One of these, it would seem, should have been assigned to do this important task instead of a quickly formed panel of amateurs.  It is interesting to note that the first issue of the official communist newspaper, The Worker, printed after the murder, dated November 26, 1963, called for an Extraordinary Commission headed by Chief Justice Earl Warren, to investigate this crime.  President Johnson ordered just that four days later.  I have reproduced this rare clipping from the communist press so that you can see for yourself that the communists fully trusted Earl Warren to do the investigation. 

The first piece of evidence that I am going to offer showing that there are physical alterations of evidence in the Warren Report involved in this Altgens photograph.  You will find it on pages 24 and 25 of the Saturday Evening Post, dated December 14, 1963.


 

 

 

________________________________________________________________________

The Altgens Photograph.  This picture was taken by Associated Press Photographer James Altgens and was printed as shown above in Saturday Evening Post, December 14, 1963.  I call your attention to that fact because of the distance which Altgens stood and the long focal length of his lens, this picture is foreshortened.  This foreshortening tends to exaggerate the curve of the curb making it appear to be the curve at the corner of Elm and Houston Streets.  This is not that corner but the curved portion further down Elm Street in the direction that the cars are moving. This curb you see here which appears to be about 10 feet in length is actually about 40 feet long.

 

Next, you will see a photograph from the air of Dealey Plaza which appeared on page 47 of Life Magazine, dated October 2, 1964, which was published after the conclusions of the Warren Commission were announced.


 

 

Please note that the Warren Report states that the man beside the lovely lady was shot at two locations along Elm Street which are marked with an “X.”  If you will look carefully, you will note that these two points are essentially along the straighter portions of the street as evidenced by the almost straight curb line.  Do you see that?  Now, look at the famous Altgens photograph.  This is the first known picture of the motorcade after the first shots were fired.  Note that the Secret Service personnel riding on the right side of the Presidential follow-up car, the second car, are both looking in the general direction of the Book Depository.  Note that the Vice-Presidential follow-up car, the fourth and white car, shows a state of alarm.  Do you see that the rear door is open and an agent is getting out?  Note the inclination of the car, showing that the brakes are being applied and the car is dipping to the front.  Checking the various landmarks, between the Altgen Photograph and the Life Magazine air view, you can see that this 4th car is just turning the corner onto Elm Street at the time of this picture.  Study carefully.  Do you see that?  Now, look through the windshield of the Presidential car and you will see the white gloved hand of the pretty lady holding the arm of the man hit by the gunfire.  Do you see that?  Thus you can see that this man beside the lovely lady had been hit sometime earlier than the instant of the Altgens photograph, for both the man and the lovely lady had time to react to the bullets.  Now, scanning across to the right from the front bumper of the Presidential car to the curb, you will observe that this picture was taken at a time when the Presidential car was still opposite the curved outward portion of this curb. Thus you can see for yourself that the first shots were fired, not half-way down Elm Street as the Warren Report states, but sometime just after the Presidential car had rounded the corner onto Elm Street.  This one picture is worth [much] and disproves a hundred thousand words of testimony and doctored conclusions.

Now, while examining this photograph, note that there is a tree full of foliage just behind the agents on the right side of the 2nd car.  This tree is interposed between the Presidential car and Oswald’s position on the 6th floor of the Book Depository.  Although you cannot determine it for certain from just this one picture, the plain fact is that this tree obscures Oswald’s line of sight at the very moment that the first bullets had to have been fired!  This fact is established in the Warren Report on page 98, the last four lines where it states:

“It is probable that the President was not shot before (Zapruder film) frame 210 since it is unlikely that the assassin would have shot him with the view obstructed by an oak tree when he was about to have a clear opportunity.”

Frame 210 is supposed to be the position of the first “X” In the above picture.  Since the Altgens photograph proves conclusively that the first shots were fired just after the Presidential car had rounded the corner, sometime before the Altgens photograph was taken, and not half-way down Elm Street, I will now reveal the first evidence of a tampered photograph.  The official Warren Report, page 113, shows this photograph. You guessed it!  They have chopped off the photograph at the point where I have drawn a white line down through the picture.  Thus, they eliminated the curb portion of the picture, the significant details of the 4th car, and the shadow of the tree in the street which locates the position of the cars at this time!  This “official” chopped off version of the Altgens photograph was also offered as authentic on page 50A of Life Magazine October 2, 1964.

This is, in my opinion, a key point in any solution to this incredible murder.  I regard the altering of this picture as being part of the conspiratorial criminal cover-up activity following this famous Dallas murder.

 

Chapter Three

The most important part of this study lies in the number and direction of the shots fired. The Warren Report says that there were only three shots fired, stating, in part:

The consensus among the witnesses at the scene was that there were three shots fired. However, some heard only two shots, while others testified that they heard four shots, and perhaps as many as five or six shots.”

The Warren Commission based its conclusion on the fact that only three shell casings were found at Oswald’s position.  Since the weapon’s clip could not hold more than six rounds, that limited the number of bullets to a maximum of six if they intended to stick to the story that Oswald had acted alone.

Here is the major flaw in that theory.  According to the Warren Report, the man beside the lovely lady was hit with two of three shots.  Oliver Stone insists that Oswald missed with his first shot, but there is nothing but speculation to establish that.  According to the Warren Report, one of these bullets hit the man in the back of the head, and the other hit him in the back, 5 and 3/8” below the collar of his shirt.  The Warren Report says that Oswald hit with the first two and missed with the third.  With that in mind, consider the sticky question of the bullet holes in the back, wrist and leg of the passenger in front of the man beside the lovely lady.  How did these holes get there, according to the Warren Report?

That third bullet, they say, hit the man beside the lovely lady in the back, came out his throat under the adam’s apple, went into the back of the man in front of him, through his chest breaking a rib on the way, exiting just below his right nipple, then slammed through his wrist smashing a bone, and then finally lodged in his left thigh.  Then this bullet somehow worked out of its wound in the thigh and fell onto the stretcher where it was later found in almost perfect condition.  My Sketch #1 shows how this bullet travelled according to the Warren Report.

 

 

 

However, when you also consider the physical position of the man beside the lovely lady, and the reported bullet holes in his body, the Warren Report trajectory becomes a hoax. According to the unanimous conclusion of the Warren Commission, whose only surviving member today is former President Ford, this bullet #3 left Oswald’s rifle traveling downward at an angle of 21*34’, until it hit man beside the lovely lady 5 and 3/8” below the collar.  From there, this magic bullet went upwards and out his throat just under the adam’s apple.  To do that it would have to travel upward at about 12°.  Then, to hit the man beside the older lady in front of him where it has been alleged, it would have to make an other turn in mid-air, going downward through his body, then pass through his right wrist and make another turn, left, and downward, and hit the man in his left thigh.  Combining the Warren Report version with the physical evidence, we have a bullet that travelled as shown in my Sketch #2.

 

 

 

Let’s review again the neck wound of the man beside the lovely lady.  Get a man’s shirt and mark a point on the back that is 5 and 3/8 inches below the collar.  Hold that shirt in an erect position.  How could a bullet come downwards from the 6th floor of the Book Depository, hit the man in the back and go out through the knot in his tie traveling upward?  Such a wound would be possible only if the man had his bead between his knees, but we know from the pictures that this was not the case.  That little fact may be the reason why the X-ray pictures of the body have not been released from the Bethesda Naval Hospital.  The medical reports of the bullet holes differ between Parkland and Bethesda Hospitals, a serious point that I will cover later in detail.  It is enough, at this time, to say that examination of this neck wound, in medical testimony, establishes it as an entrance, not an exit wound. This testimony of Dr. Peters, appears in Vol. 6, page 71 of the Commission Hearings.

Based upon this, and other evidence, the only logical conclusion is that this bullet entered the body from the front and not the back!  If this is the case, this bullet, at least, could not have come from Oswald’s carbine, but must have originated from the south side of Elm Street, opposite the Book Depository, travelling in almost a horizontal path.  This would logically put the gunman somewhere on the ground, or in a position near ground level, and on the opposite side of the street from Oswald.  Such a bullet path would fit the physical description of the neck wound and I have shown this path in my Sketch #3.

 

 

Based upon the position of the Presidential car in the Altgens photograph, and the conditions where a bullet could come in from the left, while missing the windshield, the older lady, the driver, and the side window, we can just about plot what position such a gunman would have to have been in with relation to the car.  This would have to be somewhere in the grass or curb almost directly south of the Book Depository.  Also, in direct refutation of the Oliver Stone theory, there were no bullets that entered the right side of the car from a position on the so-called grassy knoll.  Neither knoll would have a line of sight where the cars were located at the time of the first bullet’s impact.  For instance, the windshield would have been in the way of a rifle shot from the grassy knoll behind the fence, etc.  I will say more about this JFK theory later.

 

Chapter Four

The question to be resolved is this: If Oswald had no line of sight to the Presidential car at the time two bullets hit the man beside the lovely lady, and the “throat shot” was an entrance wound not an exit wound, where is any such gunman?  Fortunately, two people managed to take pictures which disprove the Warren Report theory, and shoot holes in the theory of the now-famous movie JFK.  We have discussed Altgens.  Now, let’s examine the 8mm movie by Abraham Zapruder.  Shown here are two frames for this film first printed in Life Magazine November 29, 1963.  The movie is not sharp because it was hand-held and made a tiny color negative only about 1/4” wide.  Detail is lost as it is enlarged.  Further detail is lost when I “half-tone” the color pictures into black and white for this publication.  I suggest that you seek out the original magazines if you want to do serious research into my solution to this famous murder.  Working with a magnifying glass, I have provided sketches of what I see in the original pictures.  They are not entered as evidence, but only as a closing argument.  I have taken the liberty to show what I see in them.

As we examine these two frames very carefully, we remember that they show the south side of Elm Street.  There, for all the world to see, is a man who appears to be in the stance of a pistol marksman in two successive frames.  The man I will prove can be seen in only five published frames shown in three different copies of Life Magazine published several years apart. The first two are copied directly from Life Magazine November 29, 1963 page 24, frames 2 and 3. The third frame is from Life Magazine October 2, 1964. The fourth and fifth frame showing this man, I have not taken the space to publish, but you can find them showing this gunman in Life Magazine November 25, 1966 on page 40 and marked as frames #193 and #206.

First, let’s examine the frame on the upper left, and sketched below.  At the very right edge of this frame, do you see a man wearing a hat and a black coat?  Observe that his right hand is up and his elbow is cocked as though ready to draw down and aim a pistol.  Do you see that elbow?  Notice the slight bend in his knees as he appears ready to begin his aiming routine.   Notice the little girl who is running at his right and toward him.  Now notice, still in the first frame, that there is a woman with her back to the motorcade, who is stepping up onto the curb in front of the man with the black coat.  She is probably trying to get out of the way of the motorcycle policemen.  Do you see her with one foot on the curb and one foot still in the gutter?

 

 

 

Now look at the same two figures in the next frame.  The man in black, still in a slightly crouched position, now has his arm extended to ward the Presidential car.  He has, at this moment, just finished shooting the first of what I believe to be a burst of four shots from an automatic machine pistol.  Notice the woman now.  Her legs are splayed outward.  Look carefully.  Do you see them?  Note that she seems to be falling as her height is now below the armpits of the man in black.  This poor woman walked right into the path of the bullets from this gunman’s machine pistol and was hit by one or more of them!   Did you ever hear of a woman being killed in Dealey Plaza that day?  It is one of the best kept secrets of the Warren Commission.  Remember, these two frames were printed in the first issue of Life Magazine after the Dallas murder, and long before the Warren Report issued its deceptive conclusion: “lone assassin, no conspiracy.”

 

 

Now, look at the large picture from Life Magazine October 2, 1964, page 43.  Do you see the gunman there in the black coat?  [Unfortunately, the photographs contained in the Dallas Conspiracy booklet are a very poor quality, so they are not reproduced here.  If you have access to copies of the magazines referenced, perhaps you could photocopy those for me.  However, I will point to this frame in my follow-up article to Dallas Conspiracy. – Eli]  He has turned and appears about to open fire again toward the back of the Presidential car.  Do you see the appearance of the small puff of smoke that lightens up the area between the two windows on the building in the background?  Do you see the rather long profile of the man’s machine pistol?  I believe that this weapon has a silencer screwed on the end of the barrel, and even “smokeless” gun powder, when slowed down passing through a silencer, can be seen. You see it here.  A second pistol is very probably n his left hand.

Now, I want you to look at the third picture I have printed from Life Magazine October 2, 1964.  As with the first two, note the signboard in the lower right part of the picture.  Note that the Presidential car has only moved a few feet in the time between picture #2 and picture #3.  Would you think it reasonable to estimate the time as being less than 5 seconds with the car travelling at 12 mph?  Could it be even as little as one second, or less, between the pictures?

Now, point out for me the woman you saw in picture #2.  Where is she?  She has vanished!  She was air-brushed out by Life Magazine in an effort to hide the fact that she was shot and killed by that man in black!  Picture #3, shown in Life Magazine is a fraud on the American public.  [This photo is too unclear to reproduce here. – Eli]  However, if you will look carefully at picture #2, as shown in this Life Magazine you will see that this poor woman was carrying something white under her left arm.  It is perhaps a purse or a package of some kind. Do you see it there? Now look again at picture #3.  Do you see that the purse or package is still hanging there in mid-air?  It was left behind by a careless retouch job on that picture!  Amateurs! 

Why do you suppose that Life Magazine would go to all that trouble if this were not the true gunman in Dallas that day?

Oswald was right on three counts.  He said he never killed anyone, and his recorded voice, when put across a voice stress machine, indicates that he was not lying.  Second, his hands were checked for nitrates, and he had not fired a weapon that day.  Third, it is clear that he was framed, a point brought out in the JFK movie.  Is this all a figment of my imagination?  You can see what you see but you might think he is a kindly old man who needs to wear a coat when most of the ladies in the picture are in their shirt sleeves.  Later fake editions of this Zapruder film have been altered so.  They have been shown widely and purport to show that this woman’s coat is swirling around the man’s legs and that she is exactly super-imposed behind him in this frame so that she cannot be seen.  How then do they explain the smoke coming from the muzzle of pistol?  There is more, a whole lot more, but I am going to drop one more riddle for the Oliver Stone fans to solve.

 

Chapter Five

I want to call your attention to the police officer on the motorcycle nearest the curb.  His name is B. J. Martin. There were only 1,300 copies of the 26 volumes of the Warren Hearings ever printed, so I doubt that you can find a copy except in a very large library.  In many libraries, their copies have disappeared soon after the initial publishing of my pamphlet, Dallas Conspiracy, 24 years ago.  However, if you can find a set, open Vol. 6 to page 292.  There you will find the testimony of this Officer Martin.  Since most of you will not be able to find a copy, you will have to take my word for what I am going to print as his testimony.

Mr. Ball: Did you notice any stains on your helmet?

Mr. Martin: Yes, sir. During the process of working traffic there I noticed that there were blood stains on the windshield of my motor(cycle) and then I pulled off my helmet and noticed that there were blood stains on the left side of my helmet.

Mr. Ball: To give a more accurate description of the left side, could you tell us about where it started with respect to the forehead?

Mr. Martin: It was just to the left -- of what would be the center of my forehead -- approximately halfway, about a quarter of the helmet had spots of blood on it.

Mr. Ball: What about your uniform?

Mr. Martin: There was blood and matter on the left shoulder of my uniform.

So, how did Officer Martin get this blood and matter on the left side of his uniform? Observe, from all three pictures that the officer’s helmet is to the rear of the gunman’s target.  The bullet that shattered the woman’s head sprayed a cloud of blood and matter into the air and the officer ran right into it.  If this blood had come from anyone within the car, it would have been on the officer’s right side, not his left.  Do you understand that?  That blood and flesh could not have come from within the car, and there were no other places that day wherein Officer Martin could have picked up that blood and flesh, except from this woman.  As chance would have it, there is no record that I can find of the name of that woman or how she suddenly disappeared into thin air in the second or two between picture #2 and picture #3.

What did the other police officer have to say that may be of interest here?  The other Officer was Bobby Hargis and his testimony is found in Volume 6, page 294.  Here is what he had to say, in part:

Mr. Stern: Just a minute, do you recall your impression at the time regarding the source of the shots?

Mr. Hargis: Well, at the time it sounded like the shots were right beside me.

And so they were!  I suggest that the man in black was standing just a few feet from the Presidential target calmly firing a series of bursts of shots from his silenced machine pistol as these motorcycle officers were riding by.  From the physical evidence, I believe that the first was a burst of four shots.  The first hit his target in the chest.  The second hit him in the neck.  The third hit him in the forehead blowing out the right rear of his head and slamming his head backwards at the same time.  The third or fourth hit the lady who walked in front of him, and sprayed blood and flesh all over Officer Martin.  The fourth also hit a man on the street in front of the Book Depository according to witness Carolyn Walter in Volume 6, page 294.  Many witnesses testified as to the noise of a “burst of shots” or a “flurry of shots.”  The Los Angeles Herald Examiner of that day, November 22, 1963 page A4, reported:

“Three bursts of gunfire, apparently from automatic weapons were heard...blood was spattered all over the limousine...”

The teletype from Dallas, in a report by Merlman Smith stated:

“The gunfire might possibly have come from an automatic weapon. There were three loud bursts...”

In my original 1968 publication, I had not identified the man in black who shot at the man in the Presidential Lincoln.  For the reprint in 1971, I still could not identify him. After I moved to North Carolina in 1973, I was approached by some very highly placed intelligence contacts who were patriots, and from one of these I learned the true name of the man in black.

His name, identified for the first time in print as the actual assassin, was Georges Von Mohrenskold aka, George Sergei De Morenschildt.

Among his CIA code-names during this assignment were “Saul” and “Troit.”

I can further state that Mr. De Morenschildt died from a shotgun wound to the head on March 29, 1977 at about 2:21 PM at Palm Beach, Florida.  Naturally, it was ruled a suicide.  I believe that this was so that he could not testify to the House Committee on Assassinations that began hearings in 1977 and issued yet another false official assassination report in 1979.

______________________________________________________________________

* Northpoint Team Editorial Commentary.  I do not keep sensitive intelligence data and information, such as my set of the 26 Volume Warren Commission Hearings, the identity of my sources, and so forth, in either my home or my office.  They are secured safely in another state.  Those who have high enough federal security clearances will be able to recognize these two words: S**** D*****.  Enough said, except anyone who can identify these two words will know that I have taken major precautions to protect those who have helped me.  We know that Von Mohrenskold, aka, De Morenschildt, was a wealthy, cultured White Russian who travelled in the highest financial and social circles. At the very same time, he was a known friend and mentor to Lee Harvey Oswald.  Oswald even used De Morenschildt as a reference for a job!  In pre-revolutionary Russia DeMorenschildt was a Russian Count.  His uncle, Ferdinand, married the daughter of William Gibbs McAdoo, who was then Chairman of the Federal Reserve Bank.  McAdoo was President Wilson’s Secretary of the Treasury and helped put through both the Federal Reserve Act and the Federal Income Tax.  McAdoo married President Wilson’s daughter on May 7, 1914.  One of his daughters by this marriage, Eleanor Wilson McAdoo, married Ferdinand Von Mohrenskold, who was the uncle of the man in black.  McAdoo was a partner with Paul Warburg in the bank that handled the Rothschild money to finance the Russian Revolution.  He knew how to play chess and polo, knew when to wear a black tie to an evening function and circulate in the highest levels of society and the diplomatic corps.  He was a crack shot with a pistol in either hand and had been a CIA ‘bag man’ the past.  He was trained as a petroleum engineer, with a Master’s Degree.  We know that he was given a CIA contract on the President at the Hotel Ibolele in Port of Prince, Haiti in May, 1963.  At that time, he used the code-name ‘Saul.’  He also used the code-name ‘Troit.’  He had gone there, supposedly and as a cover, on oil business on behalf of some Texas oil people; and his tie to George Bush, and the Zapata Operation at the time of the thwarted Cuban Bay of Pigs Invasion, can be established.  De Morenschildt admitted to a friend, Dutch journalist Willem Oltmans, that he was involved in the Dallas Conspiracy.  Here is the most curious matter regarding this man in black.  He was a very close friend, some say a lover, of Mrs. Hugh Archincloss, the former Janet Bouvier, who is none other than the mother of Jackie Bouvier Kennedy, the wife of the man we knew as John Fitzgerald Kennedy.  Small world.


 

 

Chapter Six

“If You Expect A People To Be Ignorant And Free,

You Expect What Never Was And Never Can Be.

-Thomas Jefferson

 

Now, let’s review before going on.  Thus far, I have shown you several interesting things about the first three shots.  I have shown you that they could not have come from Oswald’s carbine, because he did not have a line of sight to where the Presidential car was at the time those shots were fired.  Second, I proved to you that the “throat shot” hit the man beside the lovely lady from the front not the back.  Next, I have shown you a man in the crowd, in the proper physical location to have done the shooting, and provided you with three different pictures showing him in three different body positions normally taken by a pistol marksman.  Further, I have included reference to testimony that one person, other than the man riding beside the lovely lady, was hit by gunfire on the sidewalk near the Book Depository, out of range of either anyone on the “grassy knoll” or Oswald.  I have shown you a photo of a lady, shot and killed, with her blood and flesh spattered over still another person, both opposite Oswald’s 6th floor location.  Finally, I have shown that two of the vital photographs of the murder scene have been altered, causing a spectator to simply vanish into thin air.

Since there appears to have been at least two persons involved in the murder, Oswald and his mentor, the man in black, George De Morenschildt, then a conspiracy to kill the President has been established.  Since two vital photographs have been changed by persons other than Oswald or De Morenschildt, then the fact of a conspiracy to deceive the American people has also been established.  It is almost impossible to uncover and expose facts that took 26 Volumes to cover up.  I am asking that this Dallas murder case be reopened and let the chips fall where they may.  One of the strongest temptations, which I am trying hardest to resist, is to offer motives and conclusions concerning the reason why the murder of the President might be called for by persons in a coup d’etat conspiracy.  For more than twenty years, people having read my Dallas Conspiracy have written and asked me for the reason why.  I do not know the reason why.  I do have some opinions.  All I know is a good deal of the evidence surrounding the murder and precisely how it was carried out.  Even so, there are going to be some things referred to in this pamphlet about which I do not have the space to document the testimony.  In those instances, I offer my apologies along with the volume and page of the Hearing references.  Serious students may then make their own effort to check those references out for themselves.

With that limitation acknowledged and set forth, let’s forge on again.  We are going to examine some statements and testimony concerning a conflict in the injuries attributed to the man riding beside the lovely lady.  My first example appeared in the Los Angeles Times November 23, 1963 which reported:

“...The wound in the throat was small and neat. Blood was running out of it. It was running out too fast...”

PARDON ME, but... We know about this bullet for it is the one we have been discussing and generally referred to as the “throat shot.” Continuing, they report:

“…The occipito parietal, which is part of the back of the head had a huge flap.  The damage a .30 caliber bullet does as it comes out of a person’s body is unbelievable.  Blood from the head wound covered the floor.  There was a mediastinal wound in the chest.

In the same issue of the Los Angeles Times there appears another report of an eye-witness regarding the injuries that he saw.  He is a 9th grade pupil named Alan Smith who reports:

“The crowds were cheering, but all at once they started screaming.  The car was about ten feet from me when a bullet hit the President in the forehead.

PARDON ME, but... Here are two eye witnesses who report that the man riding beside the lovely lady got hit by three bullets, one in the chest, one in the throat, and one in the forehead.  These are wounds which most Americans have never even heard about. Curiously, two doctors who attended the body at the Dallas Parkland Hospital said almost the same thing and recorded in Volume 6, page 67:

“I assume that the right occipital region was the exit.”

PARDON ME, but... Any bullet that went out the back of the head must have gone in the front.  Any problem with that?

Dr. Peters testimony, found in Volume 6 at page 71, again establishes the same thing:

Mr. Spector: Did you notice any holes below the occipit?

Dr. Peters: No, I did not and the time and moments following, the injury, we speculated as to whether he had been shot once or twice because we saw the wounds of entry in the throat and noticed a large occipital wound.  And it is a known fact that high velocity missiles often have a small wound of entry and a large wound of exit, and I am just giving you my honest impression at the time.” *

Here is where things really start to get interesting.  Note that there are several witnesses to the bullet holes of entry in the chest, throat and forehead involving two doctors, a news reporter, and a 15 year old boy standing only ten feet away.  After the famous body completed its autopsy, it left Parkland Hospital in Dallas bound for the Bethesda Naval Hospital in Maryland, near Washington, D. C.  Here a “second” autopsy was to be performed for reasons we have yet to discover.  Secret Service agent Kellerman testified to what he observed during this autopsy recorded in Volume 12, page 81:

Mr. Kellerman. Entry to this man’s head was right below that wound right here;

Mr. Spector: Indicating the bottom of the hairline to the right of the ear, about the lower third of the ear.

Mr. Kellerman: Right, but it was in the hairline, sir.

Commander James J. Humes, the Senior Pathologist at Bethesda stated almost the same thing, as found in Volume 2, page 355:

“We found the right cerebral hemisphere was markedly disrupted.  There was a longitudinal laceration of the right hemisphere which was parasagittal in position.”

PARDON ME, but... Here we have two qualified medical witnesses who state just the opposite from what equally qualified medical doctors at Parkland Hospital have entered into the medical records.  What confused my study for months, as I was doing this research, was that it is literally impossible for two sets of medical pathologists to differ so widely on their examination, only a few days apart, of the same body.  How is that possible?  Yet, I have quoted directly from the record.  There is only one conclusion possible: there had to be two different bodies being examined.

I know how incredible that sounds, and the Pandora’s Box that this revelation will be opening.  “Come on, Davis!  Two bodies?  Where are you going with this?”  I’ll tell you where: right into the heart of the conspiracy.  Now, go back and reread the reports of the civilian doctors at Parkland Hospital.  Do they mention anything about a bullet hole in the right shoulder?   No, they did not, and since the body lay naked on the table in front of them, don’t you think that they would have noticed one if it were there?  Here is what government agent Kellerman states as he watches the autopsy in the government hospital as found in Volume 12, at page 61:

Mr. Spector: All right. What other wounds, if any, did you observe on the President?

Mr Kellerman: The other wound that I noticed was on his right shoulder.

Mr. Spector: Which shoulder?

Mr. Kellerman: Right shoulder.

Mr. Kellerman goes on to describe that wound in careful detail.  These would be wounds that would substantiate the Warren Report theory that the man riding beside the lovely lady was hit from the back and not the front.  Now, if there were not two bodies, how do you account for that?  Worse yet, if there were two different bodies, how would you account for that?  The plot thickens. 

[Agent Kellerman was riding in the front seat of the Presidential limousine.  The Zapruder film clearly shows him looking back at President Kennedy, while Kennedy is holding his right shoulder with his left hand.  Kennedy had just been hit by a bullet in his right shoulder, a few seconds before the head shot.  So, Kellerman is telling the truth about the shoulder wound.  The question is from which direction did these shots come?  I will provide my own analysis after Dallas Conspiracy. – Eli]

Incredible as it seems to those who are not accustomed to astounding events surrounding that time-frame in Dallas, there is sufficient evidence to establish that there were two bodies, each killed in an absolutely different way, and both posing as the President of the United States.  Neither may be the President, but certainly both cannot be.

Can you imagine how I might hesitate to bring this up?  What other Kennedy author, of the dozens around, suggests the idea of two different bodies?  I know just how this sounds, but please bear with me for a few more pages.  Perhaps I need to add a little more documentation from both Parkland and Bethesda Hospitals.  From Parkland we read in Volume 21, page 153:

“Dr. Clark pronounced the President dead at 1 PM exactly.  All the President’s belongings, except his watch, were given to the Secret Service...He was put in a bronze-colored casket after being wrapped in a blanket, and was taken from the hospital....”

From the Bethesda report, found in Volume 2, Page 349 by Dr. Humes:

“I might preface my remarks by stating that the President’s body was received in our morgue in a closed casket. We opened the casket, Dr. Boswell and I, and the President’s body was unclothed in the casket, wrapped in a sheet marked by the Parkland Hospital, but was unclothed once the sheet was removed from his body, so we did not have at that time any clothing.”

PARDON ME, but...: Here you have a body wrapped in a blanket at civilian Parkland Hospital in Dallas, and then unwrapped from a sheet at the government hospital at Bethesda.  Would it be too much to ask, if there really were two bodies, which one of them, if any, lies buried beneath The Eternal Flame in Arlington National Cemetery?  Is it the one with the bullet holes in the chest, neck and forehead entering from the front, or is it the one with the bullet holes in the back, right shoulder, and the back of the head,  entering from the rear?

Having wondered about the “second body” riddle, I tried to find out if other autopsy reports regarding this case were just as confusing.  Except for Oswald’s murder, which happened later, and whose autopsy was so interesting that it rates a separate edition of PARDON, ME, but... some day, there was no one else, except Officer J. D. Tippit, reported killed at the same time.  So, I went looking for the autopsy of Officer Tippit.  Would you believe?  In all 26 volumes of the Warren Hearings, there is no mention whatever of an autopsy of Mr. Tippit.  There is a record of the wounds in the body of Mr. Tippit, and this is found in an affidavit of Capt. Glenn King of the Dallas Police found in Volume 20 at page 465:

“Three shots struck Officer Tippit in the temple, forehead and the chest.”

Officer Tippit’s wounds are also described in the Markham Exhibit #1.  Mrs. Markham stated:

“...(Tippit)...was shot twice in the head and once in the chest.”

PARDON ME, but... Is it not strange that the wounds of Officer J. D. Tippit, unofficially recorded by Capt. King and Mrs. Markham, and where there was no official autopsy ever made, happen to match most closely with those reported in the body of the man sitting beside the lovely lady, than do the wounds found in the body on the slab at Bethesda?  [But Kellerman’s testimony at Bethesda was that the body had been shot from the rear, so his testimony does not match either body.  Was Kellerman lying about the Bethesda autopsy, or was he unable to differentiate between entry and exit wounds? – Eli]  If that should be the case, then it is quite possible that the body buried at Arlington, which was taken there from Bethesda, may not be the one that was riding in the Presidential car, beside the lovely lady, who was certainly hit from the front.  It’s your move...

Kennedy assassination students will be quick to remind me that Officer Tippit was pronounced dead on arrival at Methodist Hospital, not the Parkland Hospital.  How then could his wounds match up with those we know were inflicted on the man sitting beside the lovely lady in the Presidential car?  Good question.  Here is the good answer.  While it is true that Tippit was officially reported DOA at Methodist, the documented fact is that his body was taken first to Parkland.  Not only that, the Dallas Police radio reported Tippit DOA at Parkland on two different occasions while communicating with their station, as set forth in Volume 17, at pages 376 and 379.

 

 

Actually, it wasn’t until much later that the dead body of Officer Tippit was taken from Parkland and reported as DOA at Methodist as set forth in Volume 17, page 472.  Why should they take a dead body from one hospital to another?  I think that it is highly irregular that a body would be reported DOA at two different hospitals, and then neither hospital produce an autopsy for the record.  What do you think?

Perhaps we shall never be certain of the answers to these questions raised here.  The X-rays of the body at Bethesda will never be made public and, for some strange reason, Dr. Humes at the government hospital at Bethesda burned his notes.  I have brought up the major point of the two different bodies, or if you insist two different descriptions of the same body, for just one reason: I was unable to continue with the actions of the man in black, CIA assassin George S. De Morenschildt, until you know that I know that there are conflicting reports.  I am stating here, from personal discussions with some highly placed intelligence people, that there were two bodies wheeled into the Parkland Hospital, one feet first and the other head first.  Both were dripping blood and each had a man’s suit coat over the face, and both were dead on arrival.           

It is my opinion, and stated to me as a fact, that one of those bodies from the motorcade was that of Officer J. D. Tippit.  Incidentally, have you ever seen a picture of Officer J. D. Tippit?  It was in the newspapers locally, but his face is not nationally known.  Tippit, shown in a baseball uniform at a younger age, was almost a perfect double of the man we knew as John F. Kennedy.  What do you think the odds would be for a random police officer, alleged to have been gunned down by a frantic Oswald, to just happen also to be a double of the President?  Just who was in that Presidential car, anyway?  I do not know for sure, do you?  Whoever it was, we know how he was killed.

[It seems to me that Nord’s question here is ill-advised, as if there were any doubt that it was JFK sitting next to his wife in the limousine.  If Officer Tippit was chosen as a body double for President Kennedy, then he would have been shot from behind, in order to simulate a “Book Depository shot.”  Exactly where and when Officer Tippit would have been murdered is a good question.  The plan was to switch the bodies somewhere between Parkland and Bethesda.  It is possible that the conspirators had planned to switch the bodies before an autopsy of Kennedy’s body could take place at Parkland Hospital.  The conspirators would have had their own people ready to take the body to DC, perhaps without any autopsy being performed in Dallas.  In all of the confusion, they may have lost contact or control of the body.  The Zapruder film clearly shows a head shot from the front, as Kennedy’s head was jerked back violently, from front to back.  The Zapruder film also shows the back Kennedy’s head being blown away.  There is no way that this could have been an entry wound to the back of the head.  Exit wounds are always larger than entry wounds.  The bodies were indeed switched, so that the body arriving in DC would match the Warren Commission’s pre-determined ruling that Kennedy was shot from behind.  That’s why there is so much confusion concerning the contradictory autopsies. – Eli.]

________________________________________________________________________

*A. we go to press, Charles Crenshaw, MD., now Chief of Surgery at Fort Worth, Texas hospital, had been on ABC’s 20/20, Friday, April 3, 1992, stating that he was a young physician at the Parkland Hospital at the time the man riding beside the lovely lady was brought into the hospital.  He stated that he examined the body several times and agrees with Dr. Peters, that the wounds were from the front, not the rear, as the Warren Commission contends.  He has courageously published a book titled JFK, The Conspiracy of Silence, that sets forth his theory of the case. You might want to add it to your collection.

 

Chapter Seven

Whatever happened in Dealey Plaza on November 22, 1963, it is certain that the President would have been dead by this time, 28 years later.  He was dying of Addison’s Disease during his Presidency, and according to the President of the American Association of Physicians and Surgeons, whom I knew at that time, Kennedy only had a few years left to live.  Almost any physician, who knew Kennedy or saw him on TV, will verify what I am stating to you here.

So, bearing in mind that I know all about the conflicting autopsy reports, I am going to return to the man in black and record for you what he does next.  I think you will find it fascinating if you have never made a study of this case in any depth.

The First Burst, Four Shots

Bullet #1 -Chest wound.

Bullet #2 -Hit lady whose blood and flesh went all over Officer Martin as he drove by, and went on to hit the throat.

Bullet #3 -Hit forehead and blew out the right rear of his head.  Any bullet coming from the grassy knoll, if you think bout it, would have blown out the left rear of his head. Come on, Mr. Stone!

Bullet #4 -Hit person on sidewalk, as set forth In Volume 20, page 410.

After firing his first burst of shots, the man in black appears to swing his machine pistol so as to track his target as it moves past him.  If he hit the man beside the lovely lady in the forehead, as Parkland stated, then he is already dead at the end of the first four shots. In any event, the man in black is not certain of the outcome, so he just keeps on firing.

The Second Burst, Five Shots

Bullet #5 -Hit the inside of the windshield of the driver’s compartment cracking the glass. Volume 16, page 945.

Bullet #6 -Hit the windshield chrome, as set forth In Volume 16, page 946.

Bullet #7 -Hit the sign. Volume 16, page 19-24.

Bullet #8 -Hit the motorcycle officer on the far side of the motorcade. Volume 18, page 763, and Volume 19, page 535.

Bullet #9 -Known as the Koolade bullet, Volume 6, page 212.

These five bullets were fired vey rapidly, as a burst while sweeping to the left, taking a slightly different angle with each bullet.  An engineering survey and study was made of these bullets by the George C. Thomson Engineering Company, of Glendale, CA. This study proved with instruments that each of these bullets followed the paths which originated from the man in black.

The Third Burst, Three Shots

The next three bullets came as a burst and hit the man beside the lovely lady, striking the man in front of him.  One cannot determine whether there were 2, 3 or 4 shots in this burst, as we do not know the exact position of the wrist.  Thus the shoulder-chest wound could have come from the same bullet that hit the wrist.  Knowing that the weapon is capable of this many shots, I have labeled each wound as a separate shot.

Bullet #10 -Right shoulder/chest. Volume 6, page 19.

Bullet #11 -Right wrist, as found in Volume 6, page 92.

Bullet #12 -Left thigh, as recorded in Volume 6, page 90.

The Fourth Burst, Two Shots

Bullet #13 -Hit child at curb on the north side of Elm Street, Volume 11, Page 218.

Bullet #14 -Hit man named John Wiseman, Volume 19, page 535.

 

 

 

The Fifth Burst, Three Shots

Now we get down to the fifth burst of shots and one of these killed the man beside the lovely lady, if you choose to reject the Parkland report and accept the Bethesda autopsy. In any event, this is the “shot” generally regarded as the fatal one based upon the Warren Report.  Thousands of column inches have been written about this “magic bullet” by dozens of writers in an effort to explain it.  Two Secret Service agents, Agent Hickey and Agent Bennett, saw the bullets hit.  What is generally not known is that the affidavit of one of these agents was contrary to the conclusions of the Warren Report.  His affidavit appears In Volume 24 at page 542.  One of the eye-witnesses was asked to testify, and the other was not.  Both sat in the rear seat of the Presidential follow-up car.  The accepted eye-witness’s testimony appears in Volume 18 at page 762.  Let’s see if you can figure out which eye-witness Earl Warren and his fellow conspirators would not ask to testify:

Secret Service Agent Hickey:

“At the moment he was almost sitting erect, I heard two reports which I thought were shots and that appeared to me completely different in sound than the first report and were in such rapid succession that there seemed to me to be no time element between them.  It looked to me as if the President was struck in the right upper rear of his head. The first shot of the second two seemed as if it missed because the hair on the right side of his head flew forward and there didn’t seem to be any impact against his head.”

Secret Service Agent Bennett:

“The President’s auto moved down a slight grade and the crowd was very sparse.  At this point I heard a noise that immediately reminded me of a firecracker.  Immediately upon hearing the supposed firecracker, (I) looked at the Boss’s car.  At this time I saw a shot hit the Boss about 4 inches down from the right shoulder; a second shot followed immediately and hit the right rear high on the Boss’s head.”

Well, which one? Agent Hickey says that the man beside the lovely lady was hit in the rear of the head but mentions nothing about a hit in the shoulder.  The Parkland report does not mention anything about a hit at the right shoulder.  Agent Bennett’s affidavit mentions the President’s car, but then talks about someone called “the Boss” who had a different set of Injuries!  Do you suppose that this is beginning to unravel the mystery of the two bodies?  There is testimony in Volume 20 at page 163 which may indicate who this second man is, but I cannot go into it in this pamphlet.  It is enough to publish here that Agent Bennett was not asked to testily.  Note however, that Agent Hickey testifies to bullets in rapid succession.  Note also that Agent Bennett mentioned noises that sounded like a firecracker.

[If you watch the Zapruder film, President Kennedy is obviously holding his right shoulder with his left arm, grimacing in pain, before the head shot.  At this point Jackie reaches over to see what is wrong.  That’s when the head shot from the front occurs.  Jackie panics and crawls onto the back of the limo.  Agent Hickey could have been telling the truth, if was only talking about the location of the head wound, without discussing the direction from which it came.  When violent events happen in a matter of seconds, one can only report the impact.  Determining where the shots came from is a completely different issue.  But Kellerman’s testimony is suspicious, because of the discrepancy between his Dallas and Bethesda reports.  - Eli]

Probably the best analysis of this “bullet,” or as I state it, the fifth burst from the man in black’s machine pistol, can be found in the September, 1967 issue of American Opinion,* in an article by the late Medford Evans.  He concluded:

“...for if Kennedy was shot from behind and not from above, and not from the right but from the left, then the list of suspects, broadens from the loner Oswald, yet remains shockingly narrow.  Eliminating at once the widow, who was victimized almost as much as her husband and escaped just by inches from being killed herself, there remain three groups of possible suspects -- persons physically in position to have fired such a shot. These were (1) spectators on the south side of Elm Street near the point of assassination, (2) members of the Dallas Police, and (3) members of the Secret Service.”

I think that it can be said that the Police Officers aboard their motorcycles could not have done the job and ride too.  There are no pictures that even suggest such activity.  It is possible that one of the Secret Service agents riding in the Presidential follow-up car could have shot at the man beside the lovely lady from behind, but how could they have fired the first burst of shots toward the car when they were riding behind?  There are no photographs that indicate any such activity.  There is a current school of thought that the driver of the Presidential car turned around and fired point blank at the man riding beside the lovely lady, ignoring the fact that there were two people between the driver and the target and a dozen other trajectories.

Thus the only group left, according to Dr. Evans, are the spectators.  The man in black is the only one who indicates from the available pictures that he is up to anything unusual.  Here is where, in my opinion, Medford Evans drops the ball.  He writes:

There were so few spectators that none of them could possibly have shot the President with a rifle or even a pistol without the virtual certainty of being seen...”

Yet Dr. Evans never suggested who could have done it.  His analysis is entirely correct and absolutely accurate, but he did not carry it to its logical conclusion.  Perhaps he decided that he had said enough.  There have been so many strange deaths, that I did not blame him.  I had the utmost respect for Dr. Evans and personally knew him to have been one of America’s finest patriots.  Yet, the assumption that a gunman would have been seen is not proof that none was there.  Assassins always assume these risks.  It was not as likely that he would be seen as one might at first think.  Those who lined the street were, for the most part, Kennedy fans.  The rest came for a personal glimpse of the President of the United States, an event which is at least unusual for most of them.  Having come for this purpose, and waiting for as long as an hour, it is certain that their attention would have been focused on the man or the lovely lady as they were riding by.  Second, most of the spectators were on the north side of the street and various vehicles of the motorcade were between them and the gunman in black during those few moments.  Third, the motorcade was moving between 15 and 20 feet per second.  The maximum time that the gunman would need to have his weapon exposed would be less than ten seconds.  Even if he had it out and in use for as long as twenty seconds, how many would have seen it during the moments as the Presidential car passed, or even heard a silenced pistol? Fourth, the people on the north side of the street would be looking south, right into the sun low in the sky of a November day.  Regardless of all the logical arguments, one way or the other, the fact is that the man in black did shoot as many as 21 shots in rapid succession in less than ten seconds.

Finally, go back and read the data given by Agent Bennett in his affidavit.  Note that he stated that he heard the sound of firecrackers just before the shooting started.  That was not unusual testimony, for no less than 20 expert witnesses before the Warren Commission stated that they heard the noise of firecrackers.  For example, read Volume 7 at pages 107, 509, 517, 540, etc.  Most of these indicate that the firecracker noise came from the general direction of the Book Depository.  Without exception, every single Secret Service agent mentioned the noise of firecrackers just before the shooting started. Some of the testimony concerns pieces of spent firecrackers found near the front entrance of the Book Depository which is below Oswald’s window.  If Oswald was doing all the shooting, who was tossing out the firecrackers from the open window?  Secret Service agents are well-trained men.  They have learned to identify sounds of different firearms, and certainly know that the sound of a firecracker is not the same as that of a rifle or carbine.  Agent Kellerman was riding in the front seat of the Presidential car.  He testified to the noise of the firecrackers and indicated that an automatic weapon was used.  This can be read in Volume 2 at page 76:

Mr. Spector: Now in your prior testimony you described a flurry of shells into the car. How many shots did you hear after the first noise which you describe as sounding like a firecracker?

Note: This is not the first ‘Oswald bullet,’ but the first burst of 4 bullets.

Mr. Kellerman: Mr. Spector, those shells came in all together.

Mr. Spector: Are you able to say how many there were?

Mr. Kellerman: I am going to say two, and it sounded like a double bang -- bang, bang.

Note:  These ‘bangs” are not the first two “Oswald bullets,” but the first two bursts of automatic fire, totalling nine bullets.

Mr. Spector: What is the best estimate of time in seconds from the first noise sounding like a firecracker until the second noise you heard?

Mr. Kellerman: It was instantaneous.

Mr. Spector: No; let me repeat the question so that you understand it. From (sic) the time you first heard the noise coming from your right rear which you describe as sounding like a firecracker, until you heard the flurry of shots?

Mr. Kellerman’s answer is long and drawn out, but he gives the time interval of no more than 2 or 3 seconds.  So, you can see that the firing of the machine pistol of the man in black began only seconds after the diversionary noise began.  Evidence seems to prove to me that the man in black was waiting for it.  Please remember that Oswald’s clumsy bolt-action carbine could not put out anything like a “flurry of shots.”  Apparently, this is the reason that the Secret Service agents were looking toward the Book Depository in the Altgens photograph.  Certainly many of the spectators did so soon after and would not have seen the man in black in operation.  These diversionary firecrackers held their attention just long enough for the man in black to complete his mission.  Just the matter of the firecrackers alone, since Oswald could not have set them off and fired his carbine at the same time, is enough to prove a conspiracy.  Thus far, in this fifth burst, we have:

Bullet #15 -Hit hair but missed the head of the man beside the lovely lady.

Bullet #16 -Hit the back of his head and was the fatal bullet if you reject Parkland and accept the Bethesda autopsy.

Bullet #17 -Hit “the Boss” in the right shoulder.

[It is my opinion that it was Oswald himself who set off the firecrackers.  The Altgens photo shows a man, who looks very much like Oswald, standing in the doorway of the building, looking at the motorcade.  Look at the Altgens photograph again.  It appears that the two Secret Service agents, who are standing on the running board of the passenger side of the vehicle behind the Presidential limousine, are looking right at the man standing in the doorway!  And that man is looking right at the two agents!  Someone else put the cheap carbine up on the sixth floor of the Book Depository, while Oswald was at ground level setting off the firecrackers.  The spent shells found by the open window had probably been fired previously and dropped there by the agent who was setting up Oswald.  This would explain why Oswald had no trace of nitrate on his hands.  Oswald did not fire a rifle, nor was he even necessarily  up on the 6th floor.  All he did was light the fuse of the firecrackers and throw them in front of the building.   But Oswald was “captured at the scene,” perhaps by the very agent who placed the cheap carbine by the window.  Then Oswald was taken to police headquarters, where Jack Ruby (Rubenstein), having gained access through a rear door ordinarily locked to the public, “just happened to be at the right place at the right time,” shot him, even though there was little or no public identification of Oswald at this point.  The facts are these:  An average citizen could not possibly have known the who, how, where, what and when, in order to track Oswald down in the hallway of the police department – in front of a camera yet!  What are the odds!  This can only have been arranged in advance, like a grade Z script from a Harlotwood movie, starring Vincent Price and Jerry Lewis!  As with 9/11/2001, we are asked to believe the impossible and the ridiculous, with heaping doses of contempt for the masses from the Illuminati.  Had Oswald lived, we would have learned about those firecrackers in 1963!  – Eli.]

The Sixth Burst - Four Shots

At this point in time, whether you accept Body #1 and its wounds from the Parkland Hospital autopsy, or Body #2 from the Bethesda Naval (Government) Hospital autopsy, as being that of the man beside the lovely lady, the fact is that the target, was, at this point in time, quite dead.  He died instantly, and well before leaving Dealey Plaza in the Presidential car.  However, the man in black did not know it for sure, and he kept right on shooting.

Bullet #18 -Hit the pavement of Elm Street set forth In Volume 6, page 221.

Bullet #19 -Hit pavement at left of the Presidential car as set forth in the Skelton testimony, Volume 6, page 238.

Bullet #20 -Hit the turf near the overpass and was discovered by Patrolman Foster and set forth in Volume 6, page 252.

Bullet #21 -Hit the curb of Main Street near the underpass, a fragment of which hit Mr. James Tague in the cheek.  You will find this evidence In Volume 7, page 552.

Note that none of these last four shots could have come from any gunman behind the fence on the “grassy knoll” as suggested in the movie JFK.

I have provided you with the documented evidence of at least 21 bullets fired by someone in Dallas during the murder of the man riding beside the lovely lady.  Yet after their sobering deliberations, the Warren Commission unanimously concluded:

“The consensus among the witnesses at the scene was that there were three shots fired. However, some heard only two shots, while others test that they heard four shots and perhaps as many as five or six shots.”

I am only an amateur at criminal investigations.  I do have professional friends who have helped me.  From them, whose names need not be mentioned, and my own personal research, you have before you the solution to the most famous murder in history.  Like most crimes, the solution, once deduced, seems obvious and simple.  Oswald, though captured and publicly executed, did his assigned task very well.  The man in black escaped and for some reason the Warren Commission, and later Congressional investigations,  have decided to ignore all theories but one: Lone assassin, no conspiracy. Isn’t it about time you began asking questions as to why?

Nord Davis, Jr.  Northpoint.

 

Epilogue

1

An epilogue is something that rounds out a literary or musical work and gives it that final punch so that hopefully it will be remembered forever. Well, perhaps this is too assuming a heading for what is to follow.  Isn’t it enough that you have the awesome facts on the most famous Dallas murder?  Tell me, has the proof of a conspiracy been pretty well established, beyond any reasonable doubt, in just these few pages?

I suppose if it had not been for Oliver Stone’s propaganda movie, JFK, I might not have bothered to reprint our Dallas Conspiracy, content to leave its revelations to the students of conspiratorial history.   After all these years, who really cares what happened in a ten second span of time on November 22, 1963?  The problem is simply this: I have published that there was a conspiracy to kill the President and install another Executive into the White House.  While Mr. Stone correctly champions the conspiracy theory, he goes to great length to lay that wicked association at the feet of the wrong parties!  These are people who he states are of the patriotic Right, when clearly all evidence points to those who are either known communists, as was Oswald, or openly sodomites such as David Ferrie and Clay Shaw.  He gives the impression that the murder was the work of the “Military-Industrial Complex,” with the help of the Mafia, the CIA, and the international bankers.  Which may well be true!  The objectional part, and perhaps the covert purpose of the film, is his insinuation that these entities are also of the patriotic Right, when in fact they have been working to support international socialism for decades, and do not represent the essence of the American way.  [Blame it on the victims!!   That’s what the Illuminati always does!  - Eli]

My purpose, therefore, is to provide a low-cost pamphlet that can be given away by the thousands to those who are attending the JFK movie.

I watched the JFK movie twice, and made an audio recording of it.  I did not appreciate its filthy language, its homosexual scene, its suggestions of nudity and its disjointed history.  The movie needed none of these things to make its point.  Stone provides us the best insight into his movie motives when he is recorded in an interview with Time Magazine, December 23, 1991 as admitting:

“I think the artist has the right to interpret and reinterpret history and the events of his time. It is up to the artist himself to determine his own ethics by his own conscience.”

What utter nonsense!

Frankly, there is already more information in Dallas Conspiracy than was provided by me in 1968.  I had planned to provide only enough information for the serious student to begin his research. With this, he could develop his own conclusions as to motives behind what happened. Yet, everyone I have ever talked to wants me to provide them with the intricate motives at the same level of accuracy as was adhered to in solving this murder. This cannot be done!  One can only imagine what could be written if one wanted to speculate in that treacherous arena!  We know, for in stance, that JFK was suffering from Addison’s Disease, a fatal degeneration of the adrenal cortex.  A former President of the American Association of Physicians and Surgeons was a good friend, and he confided to me that it was not likely that Kennedy would have had five years to live on the date of the Dallas murder.  However, health permitting and no scandal surfacing, he may have been renominated by his party in 1964.  However, he had very serious liabilities, which made his continuing on as President unlikely.  There were perhaps a dozen of them, any of which might be enough for some people to combine together to eliminate him.  I will mention only five.

First.  He made the unwise statement on several occasions that he was going to issue non-interest-bearing United States Notes.  This is different paper money than the private Federal Reserve Notes we carry around today.  One of the last Presidents to decide on that honest financial objective for America was Abraham Lincoln.  We know what happened to him.  There is simply no way that those powerful forces, who run our government behind the scenes, are going to abandon their huge personal profits to let Americans spend their own money without paying very substantial interest charges for the privilege.

Second.  Although he was, by political philosophy, a Fabian Socialist and an honor graduate of the London School of Economics, he still did not approve of America’s military involvement in the Vietnam War designed to bring that part of the world into political and economic position for the planned New World Order.  His remarks about terminating our involvement, interpreted by Oliver Stone as challenging the power of the Military Industrial Complex, would have been enough to have him terminated as President.

Third.  As Stone’s JFK pointed out, Kennedy had stood the Soviets down regarding Cuba.  All students of the world socialist, behind the scenes, tactics know that Moscow and Washington have really been “two hands on the same person,” with the socialist “good guy - bad guy routine,” since the Wilson Administration.  What the Soviets did was in the best interests of International Socialism, now to be called The New World Order.  Kennedy had tossed a monkey wrench into their well-oiled machinery by ordering the Soviet missiles removed from Cuba.

Fourth. Had Mr. Kennedy been renominated, it is known that he intend to “dump Johnson” and call for a Vice President more in keeping with the Kennedy philosophy of government.  Johnson had a personal reason to have wanted Kennedy out of the way and might not have been willing to trust the fickle forces of Addison’s Disease to make his Presidency a reality.  With his promotion of many openly communist causes soon after Johnson became President, it might seem logical that the communists would have wanted him President.  This might explain why so many of the communist underground were involved in the murder in Dallas.  Johnson’s first visit, after being sworn in aboard Air Force One, was to the home of Abner Berry, who was then on the Central Committee of the Communist Party!  Are you shocked?  If so, you have led a sheltered life, my friend.

Fifth. We know that Kennedy, as President and as a Roman Catholic married man, was heavily involved both sexually and romantically with Norma Jean Baker, known as Marilyn Monroe.* At the same time, without his knowledge, she was also dating his brother, Robert.  This created a major problem between the two brothers.  Marilyn sang a “Happy Birthday, Mr. President” song at Kennedy’s huge birthday party at Madison Square Garden, on May 29, 1962.  She sang it with such compassion in her voice that one socialite there described the rendition as “an embrace.”  It was because of this song that Robert found out about the competition from his brother and a major White House feud broke out between them.  The two actually had a fistfight over the woman during the first week in June, 1962!  What is not at all known is that Ms. Marilyn was also sleeping with one of the Mafia’s top kingpins, the late Sam Giancana.*  Even if one is President, it is not healthy to publicly slap the face of such a mobster by sleeping with his girl.  It doesn’t matter that you might not even know about it!


 

[Marilyn Monroe on stage singing “Happy Birthday, Mr. President.”]

Seventy days later, Marilyn would be dead, executed by lethal injection.  One man, of three known to have been involved, was Ray Huntley Martin, a Mafia operative.   Thus, Sam Giancana also had personal reasons to want to see Jack Kennedy very seriously dead.  We won’t even speculate about brother Robert’s murder, will we?  What is not well known is that Sam Giancana was also a CIA asset who had the contacts and the firepower to get the job done.  Sam Giancana’s nephew, who has the same name, in his book, Double Cross, insists that his uncle was the man who arranged the murder in Dallas.  Well, perhaps.

[This sounds like a deliberate ploy to take our attention away from the REAL murderers, the Zionist Illuminati. – Eli]

 

 

[Sam Giancana]

 

In these five possible motives, I have evidence that personalities among each of them were involved in what happened in Dallas on November 22, 1963.  Beyond that, I was not there among them.  I was not privileged to see the Exhibits or hear or read the testimony that has been locked up until well into the 21st century.  If it really was a lone assassin who went crazy with a mail-order carbine, then why would the Warren Commission see fit to seal any part of the evidence?  It is clear that these two conspiracies still exist, one which killed the man riding beside the lovely lady, and another to cover up the material evidence of that famous felony.  Further, I positively state, that these two conspiracies are related, if not in fact, one and the same.

There are those who scoff at such an idea, but Mrs. Kennedy hinted at this with, her classic words as she prepared to walk down the ramp* from Air Force One in her very slightly blood-stained clothes:

“I want them to see what they have done.”

This could not be a reference to Oswald, for as far as she knew, he was safely locked up in the Dallas Police Station.  He would not be seeing her come down the ramp.  No, one must assume that she was thinking of the Washington power elite, whom she knew would be there and those whom she knew would have gained the most from a transfer of power. So, for whatever the motive behind the Dallas Conspiracy, it is a fact that a quick transfer of power was effected.  Some insist that Lyndon Johnson was the chief beneficiary.  That is not true.  We know that Kennedy had represented the Rothschild or Zionist wing of world socialists, who compete for power the Rockefeller side.  Nixon, Ford, Carter, Reagan and Bush are all on the Rockefeller side.  So, when you think of the side that won, rather than looking at Lyndon Johnson, there should be a different paradigm that falls into place.

[Here, I must fundamentally disagree with Nord.  I used to believe in this Rothschilds Versus Rockefellers business in the Seventies.  It is not true.  The Rothschilds most definitely rule the roost, and the Rockefellers are subservient to them.  The Rockefellers have been playing second fiddle to the Rothschilds since the Robber Baron days.  The global Pinstripe Mafia is run by the House of Rothschild.  They make and break empires and nations.  It was the Rothschilds who created the Federal Reserve Bank.  The Rothschilds had already developed a world empire in railroads, banking, shipping, and oil, well before the Rockefellers even got started.  The Rothschilds controlled the British Empire, Germany, South Africa, and many other smaller nations via their international banking operations.  The Rothschilds had long before established themselves as the world’s top gangster family, having financed the French Revolution, Wellington’s army against Napoleon, the British against America during the War of 1812, both sides during our Civil War, the British opium trade in China, the Boer Wars, and virtually all of the communist uprisings in Europe during the 19th Century, plus the Bolshevik Revolution, which resulted in the genocide of at least 100 million people in the communist bloc.  In addition, the House of Rothschild had financed the various secret societies of the world, such as Freemasonry, Zionism, B’nai B’rith, Marxism/Leninism, the Round Table, the Rhodes Scholars, etc., etc.  There was no way that the Rockefellers could compete against the Rothschilds.  That is actually a ruse promoted by both families in order to keep the Rothschilds firmly behind the scenes and out of the headlines.  In 1910, the ratio of power and economic holdings was probably better than a thousand to one.  John D. Rockefeller was merely an American gangster.  The House of Rothschild controlled the rest of the world.  Rather than fight against the House of Rothschild – and thereby expose both houses to public scrutiny and a possible loss of both their empires - Rockefeller struck a deal with the Rothschilds; and the House of Rockefeller became the American branch of Rothschild, Incorporated.  Essentially, the Rockefellers became a Rothschild front.  “If you can’t beat ‘em, join ‘em.”  This website gives a clearer picture of the relationship between the Rockefellers and the Rothschilds:  http://www.redicecreations.com/article.php?id=1620   This website shows how the foundations of the super-rich have funded virtually every anti-Christian and pro-communist front group in America’s history: http://www.thewatcherfiles.com/bloodlines/rockefeller.htm   Liberals and doctrinaire leftists have no idea that all of the movements they support, such as “gay liberation,” “women’s liberation,” “civil rights,” “one man, one vote,” the welfare state, and a host of other left-wing causes, come straight out of the Rothschild-Rockefeller boardrooms, with their tax-exempt corporations leading the way.  You see, monopolists HATE competition, other wise known as Free Enterprise, so they always conspire to take control of markets by taking control of people’s money, minds and souls.  They do this via the power of the Press, which is nothing but the whore that beats the war drums and lies to the people about “democracy.”  What we have is plutocracy, not democracy.  The Money Power has controlled both parties since WWII. That’s why problems never get solved.  The Democrats are left-wing Zionists and the Republicans are right-wing Zionists.  The politicians of these two parties are better actors than those in Harlotwood; and the stakes they play for are total dictatorship.  That’s why this game is so deadly. – Eli]

 

* Monroe was her mother’s maiden name.  It is common for people involved in Jewish affairs and their society, as well as those of the Jewish race, and/or those working in the entertainment business, to adopt their mother’s maiden name as their professional name. It is one of those covert evidences that they have arrived and are sold out to that culture.

 

-2-

William Manchester, in his book Death Of a President writes:

 Shriver...realized that Asia, Africa, and South America would assume that whoever killed Kennedy would now be President.”

While this may be true for the undeveloped countries of Asia, Africa and South America where a coup d’etat is common, and the results predictable, this is not necessarily true in sophisticated America.  Here such murders of political figures are the product of a ruthless group of Elite who wear pin-striped suits, and whose ultimate goal is world domination.  They have worked to ward this goal for more than 75 years and nothing, and no one, is going to stand in their way.  No popular Generals, such as MacArthur or George Patton, or even a beloved President, will be permitted to impede the methodical, step-by-step accomplishment of their goals.

By agreement and design, mass murders almost beyond comprehension have been carried out by foreign leaders with whom our government officials continue to do business and banking.  Any national leader, if he can prove that he is an international socialist, qualifies at once for American foreign aid at the expense of the taxpayers.   It is simply added to our national debt.  American servicemen are abandoned into the hands of their enemies by our leaders while Americans, like summer grass hoppers, amuse themselves with material pleasures, shallow churchianity, fornication, drugs, and the plight of the spotted owls.  […not to mention “global warming.”  - Eli]

By agreement and design, these wealthy Elite of both political parties manipulate us into one war after another, often against enemies who have but fraction of our strength.  Then in the wretched spirit of General Sherman who burned and ravaged the South in an effort to destroy the civilian population through starvation and exposure, America dropped two nuclear bombs on Japan, killing a hundred thousand innocent civilians, six months after Japan had offered to surrender.  You don’t remember that little detail?  Then, again, in the diabolical spirit of Sherman, America and England mounted the largest air attack in history, against the defenseless, “open city” of Dresden, Germany, on February 14, 1945. For all intents and purposes, the war with Germany was already over, and yet our government deliberately killed an estimated 225,000 old men and women, German soldier’s widows and children in that one night!  For years, Roosevelt’s raid on Dresden has stood as the all-time greatest deliberate sacrifice of innocent life at any one period in military history.  Today, you never hear one word about this wicked fire-bombing of defenseless Dresden in the media or in the government school history classes.

[Yet, there is positively no end of hearing about the hoaxacaust, to the exclusion of all other mass extermination events.  And your tax dollars are employed for this deliberate propaganda campaign, plus the various holyhoax museums dotted around the country, paid for, in part, by YOUR tax dollars.   As many besides myself have said, what we need is separation of Judaism and state.  “There’s no business like Shoa business.” – Eli.]

Then came Desert Storm.  By agreement and design, under the United Nations direction, Commander-in-Chief George Bush ordered the systematic fire bomb destruction of the non-combatant women and children of ancient Nineveh in northern Iraq and imposed a world blockade of all medicines, heating fuel and food to these unfortunate people.  Now it has been learned that the 90,000 American aircraft missions dropped more tonnage of explosives on that one small section of Iraq than was dropped on all of Germany In four years!  We know that 275,000 people, located 600 miles from the border of Kuwait, were killed and thousands upon thousands more were maimed for life.  How many of you reading this pamphlet ever raised your voice in objection to this war crime?  [And what did these people have to do with Saddam Hussein’s military occupation of Kuwait? – Eli] Desert Storm now stands as the greatest intentional sacrifice of innocent life, over a period of only 100 days, in world military history!  It is a national disgrace!  Yet most Americans, through ignorance or apathy, still think it was our finest hour.  Judgment is coming down on America.  It is now seen on every hand.  Those same people, who promoted and then lied to America about the Dallas Conspiracy decades ago, have once again lied to us about the secret, covert purposes of the Desert Storm War.

By agreement and design, those who have personal knowledge of the Dallas Conspiracy are being hunted down and killed.  I expect this activity to begin again now that the movie JFK has triggered a renewed interest in the events of that day in Dallas.  One of these is former Deputy Sheriff Roger Craig who saw Oswald leave the Book Depository and get into a Rambler station wagon, driven by a man of Latin (Cuban?) descent.  His testimony did not square with the Warren Commission’s agenda, and hence he was not allowed to testify before them.  This one act proved a conspiracy existed, if a pick-up man was there to whisk him away.  When Craig stuck to his story, he was fired from his job.  There were threats to his life and to his family.  When these did not silence him, he was shot as he ate in a restaurant.  He survived.  He was almost killed again when his car was blown up.  On May 15, 1975, before the new assassination hearings were to begin, Craig was hunted down, shot and killed with a rifle.  His death was ruled as a suicide.

*She did not get a chance to do this!  It was at night when Air Force One arrived in Washington and no one would notice her clothing in the dark.  President Johnson, his wife, the staff and the press walked down the formal ramp.  Mrs. Kennedy departed the plane through the rear cargo door with the casket and accompanied one of the two bodies to Bethesda in the hearse.  At Bethesda, one of the Kennedy staff members recovered her wedding ring and gave it back to her.  Did they know that her ring had been put on the wrong body?  She wore the Kennedy ring on her left hand during her wedding to Aristotle Onassis in 1968, five years after the murder in Dallas.  In the tradition of the Greek Orthodox Church, Onassis’s wedding ring given to her was worn on her right hand.  So, she was wearing the wedding rings of her two husbands.

[The mafia was most definitely involved in the assassination of President Kennedy.  Joseph P. Kennedy made his fortune running booze for the mob in the Roaring Twenties.  His partners were Eugene Meyer and Meyer Lansky.   The three of them together, had formed what became known as “Murder, Incorporated.”  Also, the mob helped John Fitzgerald Kennedy get elected President, when they influenced Richard J. Daley, Mayor of Chicago, to get out the “graveyard vote,” of dead registered voters in Cook County.  Richard Nixon knew about this and almost filed suit to contest the election, but Nixon was informed that such a move would not be good for his health.  The mob thus took credit for getting JFK elected in a close election.  When JFK and RFK turned against the mob, the Giancana mafia took this as a double-cross.  In the tradition of the mafia, when somebody double-crosses the mob, “We kill you and take your girl.  Aristotle Onassis was the world’s leading heroin shipper.  He owned a fleet of ocean freighters that delivered both legal and illegal goods.  He was definitely a major kingpin of the international mafia’s drug operations.  The movie, “French Connection,” was made possible by the Onassis drug operations.  Ladies, can you imagine Jacqueline Kennedy’s disgust at having to “marry” Aristotle Onassis? – Eli]

3

For years, American patriots have looked to the FBI as the last patriotic agency of the Federal Government.  There are many good men, some of whom I know personally, who still work for that agency.  Some patriotic organizations promote the books, such as Masters of Deceit, supposedly authored by J. Edgar Hoover.  They were ghost-written for him by an anti-Christ within the FBI.  Hoover was never a Christian.  Hoover never contested the findings of the Warren Commission, and this is not a mark of a true patriot, regardless of his position in government.  Hoover died of a “heart attack” on the Communist holiday, May Day, May 1, 1972.  There was no autopsy permitted, and the official report, and today, all references have set the date of death as May 2nd.  All the circumstances behind his death are rather strange.  In any event, Hoover would not be around to be called in any “Kennedy Assassination” investigation. 

There exists within the FBI a secret, subversive section known as COINTELPRO.  Most local agents are unaware of this section of the FBI and cointelpro operates in areas without clearing their activities with the local offices.   It operates as does Oliver North’s “CIA within the CIA,” taking orders only from very top officials.  Some time ago, a man carrying FBI credentials appeared in my home town inquiring about my activities from a number of people.  Unfortunately for him, two of those to whom he talked were part of our local Northpoint Teams, whose identity is not generally known.  Among the questions this cointelpro FBI agent asked was:

“Have you ever seen Nord Davis with, or heard him talk about, any heavy weapons such as machine guns?”

The agent was stupid, of course.  I have seen the vultures circling me for years because of my patriotic publishing, and would not be foolish enough to keep such weapons, as they are good for a 20 year prison term.  Second, if I did have an automatic weapon, such as a fine AK-47, would I be ignorant enough to talk about it or show it off to neighbors and friends?  As with Roger Craig, who knew far less about the murder in Dallas than I do, there is nothing I can do* to prevent one of their cointelpro agents from shooting me at a restaurant, bombing my car, or planting it with contraband weapons or drugs.  I understand their tactics.

We do know that Oswald was cointelpro.  He was a paid agent in this group and had an identification number of S-172.  He had in his possession a little black book [Hearings, Volume 5, pages 242-243], which contained the phone number and license tag of his FBI handler, James Hosty, a name which may have been an alias.  Oswald had played his role as a decoy perfectly even though he was not the major participant in the murder. Oswald’s FBI file was delivered to the Commission, but not even the staff members were permitted to see it.  No independent examination of it was ever made.

I probably have one of the largest collections of news clippings on the Dallas murder in existence.  I had my readers send me any and all clippings and received them by the thousands.  I hired several women, who worked for months, sorting out the duplicates and assembling them into chronological order for me.  Interesting!  From the Roanoke (Virginia) Times dated June 24, 1976, I read the following interesting statement about the Deputy Attorney General, Nicholas DeB. Katzenbach, whom we believe the cointelpro of the FBI reported to at that time:

“Just four days after the President’s murder in Dallas on November 22, 1963, the Senate Report disclosed, Deputy Attorney General Nicholas DeB. Katzenbach sent a memo to the White House declaring: ‘The public must be satisfied that Oswald was the assassin; that he did not have any confederates who are still at large; and that the evidence was such that he would have been convicted at trial.  Speculation about Oswald’s motives ought to be cut off, and we should have some basis for rebutting the thought that this was a Communist conspiracy or, as the Iron Curtain Press is saying, a right-wing conspiracy to blame it on the Communists.”

Unfortunately for the proponents of the Warren Report, the cointelpro has a modern problem.  It is the invention of the Psychological Stress Evaluator.  This device was not invented at the time of the Dallas murder.  It detects lies from the subtle changes in the subject’s voice harmonic patterns.  Stress does not always mean a lie, but the absence of stress nearly always means that the subject is telling the truth.  Tape recordings of Oswald’s interrogation at the Dallas Police Department have been studied with this new device.   He was asked:

Did you shoot the President?”  His reply was absent of any stress when he responded, “I did not shoot anybody, no sir.”

Please note that I have underlined the word anybody.  Oswald’s voice stress analysis and evaluation proves that not only did he not shoot the man riding be side the lovely lady, but neither did he shoot Officer J. D. Tippit.  This is the secondary thesis of Dallas Conspiracy, that Tippit was a double of the President and was not shot across town as the Warren Commission would have us believe!  This gives further proof of my thesis that there were two different bodies, each with different wounds, and each wrapped differently as I wrote earlier in this pamphlet.

________________________________________________________________________

*However, my Calvinist Christian faith allows me to trust Our Heavenly Father that He will send angels to take charge over me, and that nothing can ever happen to me that is not in both His and my best interests.  A dozen have had to learn that lesson the hard way and they are no longer in the land of the living.  Psalm 91 and Romans 8:28.  Knowing that, let the record show that we have taken certain precautions.  Caveat NWD 10/28/31 S**** D*****.  [Nord Davis was definitely a proponent of Christian Identity.  I had had several telephone conversations with him before he died, primarily to discuss Scripture, which he was always willing to do.  All of his Biblical publications are perfectly in line with CI.  Not all racially-aware, Illuminati-savvy Christians choose to use the label, Christian Identity.  – Eli]

-4-

On page 26 [Page 23 of this publication], I referred to the unusually high mortality rate among those Americans who, one way or another, have learned too much.  Those, old enough to remember the day of the Dallas murder, will remember the strange death of reporter, Dorothy Kilgallen.  She had an exclusive interview with Jack Ruby, the man who later shot Oswald, silencing him forever.  Her autopsy took eight days.  Her close friend, Mrs. Earl T. Smith, died of an undetermined cause two days later.  Another woman, Earlene Roberts, who had the last interview with Oswald, also died of a “heart attack” on January 9, 1966.

Rose Cheramie,* age 40, who worked for Jack Ruby, was killed Mafia- style by a hit-and-run driver on the highway outside Big Sandy, Texas on September 4, 1965.  It was ruled an accident.  Hank Killam, whose wife worked for Jack Ruby, was hounded by Federal authorities and had his throat cut on March 17, 1964.  Robert Perrin, whose wife also worked for Jack Ruby, died of “voluntarily taking arsenic.”  Betty MacDonald who worked for Jack Ruby was found hanged in a Dallas jail cell on February 14, 1964. Aren’t my news clippings interesting?  Bill Hunter, who interviewed Jack Ruby’s lawyer, Tom Howard, was shot to death by police in the police station on April 4, 1964.  Tom Howard, Ruby’s lawyer, died of strange circumstances.  James Koethe, who was present in the above interviews with Howard and Hunter, died of a karate chop to the throat on September 21, 1964.  Delilah White, age 27, who had worked for Jack Ruby, and was writing a book, was shot and killed by her husband of only 24 days.

The sodomite, David Ferrie, who was the pilot friend of both Oswald and Ruby, died of “natural causes” after leaving two suicide notes on February 22, 1967.  By the strangest of coincidences, Ferrie’s friend, Eladio Cerefine de Valle, age 43, was killed in Florida with a machette on exactly the same day that Ferrie died.  See how that works?  It is believed by this author that David Ferrie flew to Dallas from New Orleans in a red Cessna 172, with the man of Latin extraction, believed to be Eladio de Valle, to pick up Oswald outside the Book Depository.  David Ferrie, as pointed out in Stone’s movie, had few friends.  The one woman who cared at all for him was Mary Stults Sherman.  She was stabbed to death and her body burned in her apartment on July 21, 1964.

Among the police who knew too much and would not keep their mouths shut, was Lt. Paul Dyer.  He was the first of many “cancer victims” among the various witnesses.  He passed away at age 33 on February 23, 1965. Then, there was Capt. Frank Martin of the Dallas Police who made the mistake of hinting in his testimony that there was more to be told.  He “died of cancer” at age 56, on June 16, 1966.  Gary Underhill, a former CIA agent who claimed to know who was responsible for the Dallas murder, was found shot to death.  It was reported as a suicide.  He was 48.  Another “suicide” was that of William Waters, age 32, who died in a Memphis jail on May 20, 1967.  Waters had taken an “over-dose” of Demoral, according to the police, but unfortunately there was no autopsy, a convenient bureaucratic oversight.  Waters had called the FBI just after the murder in Dallas to provide some information.  He was told that he knew too much and to keep his mouth shut.  When he would not do so, he was confined to the Memphis Jail for eight months on a “misdemeanor charge.”  He did not know that he was in jail “doing life.”

The Baton Rouge, Louisiana, newspapers carried a story on October 16, 1974, concerning the unusual death of a private investigator named, William H. Cooper.  He was found shot to death in the bedroom of his apartment.  He had been actively investigating the Dallas Conspiracy for ten years.  Most of us know how it was done, but he was digging into the why.  He was close to proving that the murder was ordered and directed, as he put it in a letter to me, “by certain individuals in the U.S. Intelligence community.”  The police ruled the death a suicide.  Observe: Cooper shot himself in the right temple, transferred the .38 revolver to his left hand, wiped it clean of fingerprints, placed it on the bed beside him, and pulled the covers up over him – all in the split second before he died!  The Coroner’s report states that the bullet through his brain killed him instantly.  It is incredible what fantastic feats a dying man can accomplish.

*She is also identified elsewhere as Melba Christine Marcades, which is believed to be her real name.

-5-

There are those who have asked me over the years if I keep up with all the books published with this or that new theory of how the Dallas murder was carried out or what the possible motives might be.  My answer is no.  I have as large a collection of these books as any one.  The mark of an educated man is his knowing what not to read.  I am not going to comment on any other author’s work or suggest his motives for publishing it.  There is one such author, the attorney who had been employed by Lee Harvey Oswald’s mother in an effort to clear her son’s name, who makes the talk show circuit these days. He is listed in the 1960 Roster of the Communist Front known as the National Lawyers Guild.   In March, 1992, as I was preparing this updated pamphlet, he was heard on a talk show in Washington, DC. He was asked on the telephone by one of my Team Members as to who the man was in the black cape on the south side of Elm Street, Dealey Plaza.  In this case, his answer was correct.  He gave his name as being George S.  DeMorenschildt!

You will notice that I have deliberately avoided mentioning any of the events relating to the Dallas Conspiracy that originated in New Orleans.  It is not because I am not aware of them.  There may be some future pamphlet that could go into the Dallas - New Orleans - Bay of Pigs triangle.  If so, it needs to be explored in far more detail than I can give it in the remaining few pages.  Remember this:  George Bush has been involved with the CIA operations for many, many years, long before you ever heard of him.  Two ships owned by his family’s Zapata Oil Corporation were involved in the Bay of Pigs treachery. Would you believe, one was named The Barbara?  The other, predictably, was named The Houston.  As I stated, I am not going to go into this area further at this time, but you should know that there is this part of the story.

-6-

Hopefully, there will be some students of the events in Dallas who will carry on this study.  Many have written over the years asking for an assignment that will yield some new nuggets.  I guess if I can ask the questions, I must have an idea as to the answers.  Perhaps you can think of them as my Trump Cards that could be played someday, if necessary.  Here is your assignment --

A.  What was the purpose of the four white pillows seen on the front seat of the Vice Presidential car shown in Life Magazine November 29, 1963, page 23?  Do you see what you are looking at?  Do not write to me for the answer, for I will not disclose it to anyone or even acknowledge if you have solved this riddle.

B.  Look at the picture of Oswald on the cover of Life Magazine, February 21, 1964, and tell me in what position, relative to Oswald, the sun is located.  Do you see what you are looking at?  Cover the top half of Oswald’s body and look at the knees of his pants.  Are you looking at the back or the front of his legs?  Who authorized this fake, composite picture?

C.  We all believe that Vice President Johnson was in the motorcade.  Therefore, will you point him out for me in the Altgens photograph or explain to me why he cannot be seen in the back seat of his car?  This is an extra point question.  If Johnson is already down on the floor before the shooting started, what does that mean?

D.  Since it is known that Jack Ruby had the top half of his left index finger amputated as the result of a fight, why is it that so many available pictures of him show him with a complete left hand?

E.  Could you please indicate the source of the gunsmoke smelled by Senator Yarborough?  Volume 20 at page 351.  How about the possible source of the gunsmoke smell testified to by nurse Lozano?  Volume 21 at page 213-214.

-7-

When I first published Dallas Conspiracy in 1968, 1 would get letters from folks stating that they had read the pamphlet with great excitement.  But, then they would ask, “Mr. Davis, do you really think we will ever get to the truth?  No, we are never going to discover all the pieces to this puzzle, but we have enough to set forth the picture.  How does one figure out Theodore White’s statement n his book The Making Of  the President 1964 in the light of the Warren Commission’s simplistic lone assassin, no conspiracy conclusion, when he states, and I paraphrase:

“Johnson was first told that Lee Harvey Oswald had killed Kennedy, that Oswald acted alone, and there was no conspiracy, while Johnson was still aboard Air Force One on the way back to Washington from Dallas.”

Well, let’s see what this means.  At this specific time-frame, Oswald had just been captured!  He had not even been charged with the murder.  He had consistently denied that he had killed the President and had not even been given a paraffin test to see if he had fired a gun that day.  It was not until well after Air Force One had landed in Washington that this paraffin test was given to Oswald, and the test proved that Oswald had not fired either the carbine or his .38 revolver that day! Yet, while the plane was still en route, Air Force One was given the word that Oswald was the lone assassin.  According to Manchester, this message to Air Force One did not originate with any Dallas FBI or police source, but had come from the Top-Secret Situation Room in the White House.  How did they know, so far in advance of the facts being revealed, and with no rumors or evidence to go on, the exact conclusion that was to be reached by the Warren Commission after a year of Federal investigation?  What do you make of this?  Was William Manchester in error as to the timing of these events?  Are we on the lunatic fringe for seeing a conspiracy simply because there can be found thousands of contradictions and alterations of evidence in the Warren Report’s conclusions?  Or was McGeorge Bundy, the National Security Advisor who issued the report, a prophet?

-8-

What can you do now that you have this knowledge?  First, were you happy that someone took the time and went to the expense of providing this pamphlet for you to read?  In almost every city and town across America, there are what is known as “Goss Community Web Presses” that publish the little weekly newspapers.  Most of these have the gluing equipment to assemble a newsprint pamphlet such as this one.  They come in 30” and 35” web sizes, and if you are calling on the phone, you need the 35” web to republish this pamphlet.  Once you find one of these, get several of your neighbors or a perhaps a church or patriotic group to pitch in and pay for the printing of 15,000 or more copies.  As this pamphlet is being printed on newsprint, it is also being printed on glossy bond paper to be used as high-quality masters that are “camera ready” for your web press printer.  Because you will need both sides of the pages, two sets will be sent to you. Because we are printing only 1,000 sets, these masters will cost $20.00.  On the back cover, I have left a space for you to have your printer put your name and address, or that of your organization, where local people can go for additional copies.  In the quantity of 15,000 or more, the price should be around $1,700 or about 12 cents each.  They can be sold for $1.00 all over the place, and this profit will allow you to give many of them away at the movie theaters which are showing the movie JFK.  I ask no royalty from your profit from this venture.  All I ask is that you not alter its contents, even if you may disagree with it in some point or other.  Here is the reason.  It is my name that is on this pamphlet, not yours.  It will be me, not you, who may have to take the heat.  Every line has been written as it has for a specific reason.

[Just before he died, Nord Davis Jr. sent me a photograph of himself, standing in front of his Big Ole Lincoln.  It shows a very healthy Nord Davis.  But he was dying of cancer and had not long to live.  I was doing my own research on the Kennedy assassination, attempting to follow up on some of Nord’s leads.  Nord was a health nut, so I was wondering how he had contracted cancer.  He also told me how the Feds would send black helicopters over his house to intimidate him.  It is possible that the Illuminati had set up a radiation machine on his farm to give him “cancer.”  Today, it is common knowledge that the Black Ops departments of all subversive governments can direct low-level microwave radiation at a human target, thus “slow cooking” the victim without any outside cause being suspected by the victim.  Nord was not then familiar with this type of technology, which I believe was used to induce his “cancer.”  Natural foods advocates don’t get cancer.  Only those who indulge in the modern industrial diet get cancer, from all of the poisonous chemicals that are used in processing everything that sits on the average grocery store shelf.  I state this here just to inform the Illuminati that I am aware of all of their sophisticated gadgets; and I know how to locate any source of radiation.  By republishing this document, I am hereby assuming all of the risks that Nord is talking about here.  I am sure that he would forgive me for adding my comments to his marvelous piece of investigative journalism.  I know that his only motivation was to alert the American people to the massive deceit, treachery, subversion and diabolical conspiracy that has been operating here in America since the House of Rothschild established their Federal Reserve Bank in 1913.  Mine is the same motivation.  The Illuminati cannot afford to have this type of information become popular.  This is why they pay myriads of journalistic whores to crush the Truth and those who would tell the Truth.  In the end, you, the reader, have the right to know and decide for yourself who is telling the Truth.  Few politicians have the guts, because they know what happened to Abraham Lincoln and John F. Kennedy, to publicly challenge the Illuminati’s International Banking Mafia.  Nord Davis, Jr. did not have the internet available to him.  The only way that True Patriots can get the word out is by having other Americans spread the word.  Now, it is YOUR TURN to do what Nord and I are doing.  Share this document with those on your email list.  If you are so motivated, print out this document and give it those who do not have the internet.  – Pastor Eli James]

Other pamphlets are available that I have published that are just as revealing as Dallas Conspiracy in the subject areas that they are addressing. Here is a list of some of them that you may want to write for, and then after you approve of their contents, you may want to order them in quantity.

On Target!  86 pages on newsprint.  Third printing, 60,000 copies in circulation and still only $1.00.

Desert Shield And The New World Order 64 pages on newsprint.  What really happened in the Middle East.  250,000 copies in circulation. $1.00.

The November Journals 40 pages.  Daily thoughts during any November.  $1.00.

Gambits & Paradigms 40 pages. Understanding what makes people do what they do, from the wealthy elite to the average American.  $1.00.

Single copies of the above require postage of $1.00 each.  All of the above, in any combination, can be purchased in quantity at the rate of 100 for $40 + $10 for postage and handling.  Make checks payable to The Northpoint Teams.

-NWD

[Obviously, these addresses are now obsolete.  The best way to obtain more information about Nord Davis and his writings is to go online and just type his name into your browser.  You will see what other of his writings are available.  – Eli]

 

So, Who is Nord Davis, Jr?

Who is this man who has the audacity to challenge the collective wisdom of the Warren Commission’s Report on the Dallas murder?  When 200 million Americans think Oswald did it, why would I want to get this dead communist agent off the hook?  I am fully aware that I am swimming against the current of what is supposedly known about this famous murder.  If you expected it to be substantially the same as the Warren Report, or any of a host of other publications and they were correct, then there would have been no need for me to write it.  From our office over the past twenty eight years, we have published and distributed hundreds of thousands of newsletters and pamphlets on a wide variety of topics.  These newsletters do have a modest price on them.  You can understand that, but you should also know that all of them are initially mailed free of charge to anyone who writes us asking to be on our mailing list.  Our publishing costs are provided by The Northpoint Teams, who graciously support our research and publishing on a monthly basis.  I retired from the business world at the age of 36 so that I might give my life’s energy to some of these unusual pamphlets.

In May, 1966, I discovered that I had been one of The Called from the foundation of the world to be conformed to the image of His Son, Jesus Christ, the Lord of Hosts.  I was given the Gift of Teaching, Healing, Helps and Governments.  Romans 8:28, John 16:7-14, and I Corinthians 12:28.

This Dallas Conspiracy was first written soon after I resigned from the IBM Company to expose their sales of sophisticated computer equipment to the Communists in time of war.  My resignation made the New York Times in June, 1966.  The entire Soviet space effort, as well as their offensive missile computer capabilities, were then being supplied to them by IBM and other American computer firms.

While I am qualified to write in the field of classic economics, I prefer to be a student of conspiratorial political science and work toward the exposure of its tactics.  In 1970, I was nominated to be the American Independent Party’s Candidate for the United States Senate from Massachusetts, opposing Ted Kennedy’s Fabian socialism.  Predictably, I hardly made a dent in Massachusetts liberal electorate.  On the positive side, I have won the Liberty Award for patriotic journalism from The Congress of Freedom on five occasions.  Isaiah 58:1.

In 1972, we originated Operation Rolling Thunder, a private civilian operation designed to militarily close Haiphong Harbor in North Vietnam to prevent the enemy from getting its supplies.  As a result of that operation, and the ten day ultimatum Northpoint Teams gave to CINCPAC on April 28, 1972, President Nixon was forced to put a blockage around that harbor on May 8, 1972, to protect the supply lines to the Rockefeller EXXON refinery located there.  [Nord Davis was in Vietnam at this time, and he fully intended to bomb the Rockefeller refinery there, in order to expose to the world the fact that the Illuminati Rockefellers were treasonously doing business with the North Vietnamese Reds.  From this you can gather what a TRUE PATRIOT Nord Davis Jr. was!  This story is on our website, www.anglo-saxonisrael.com. – Eli].  As a direct result, and our Team Project goal, the Vietnam War had to be cycled down and stopped.  Daniel 11:32 and Psalm 144:1 [KJV].  I made some awesome enemies, and some grateful friends, in Washington, DC for that Tactical Project.

Many readers insist that our pamphlets on Bible doctrine are as enlightening as anything currently in print.  Americans, from all walks of Christian life, come from across America to spend a few hours or a weekend with us to learn some of the deeper Scriptural truths.  The King of Kings has given us a unique way of making the Bible spring into life.  My 64 page pamphlet, titled Desert Shield and the New World Order, has a circulation of 250,000 copies.  Some say it is one of the best blend of Bible prophecy and world events available.  In January, 1991, as Desert Storm began, I was in Amman, Jordan.  As a guest in the palace of King Hussein, a unique, Bible-based Tactical Proposal was given to the King, which was implemented on or about the 17th of January.  The net result, and the Northpoint Team goal called Project Sheba, was that Saddam Hussein was convinced to make the surprise military decision to order his troops not to kill Americans in the Desert Storm War.  Matthew 12:38-42, Jer. 19:11.

Furthermore, I hold a Doctorate in Naturapathic Medicine.  I am qualified to teach the Biological Theory of Ionization, discovered by the late Carey A. Reams, PHD, for the scientific application of food chemistry for the effective treatment of degenerative diseases.  My book, The Curse.., on the treatment of cancer and other formerly terminal diseases, is soon to be reprinted with the lay housewife, rather than the health professional, in mind.  The eleven original editions, now out of print, sold more than 350,000 copies.  Through it thousands of people have been given a new lease on life. Matthew 10:5-8.

I am proud to be a Navy Korean War veteran and the Patriotic Instructor of my local Veterans of Foreign Wars Post.  As a civilian, I was in Central America for two years working on behalf of the freedom-fighters of Nicaragua.  Matthew 25: 31-40, Judges 3:23.

-Nord Davis, Jr.

 

 

 

[Back Page of Dallas Conspiracy booklet. 1992]

[This concludes Dallas Conspiracy, as published by Nord Davis in April of 1992.  I encourage all readers to circulate this message far and wide.  The Zionist Conspiracy to destroy America is hard at work, destroying our economy, with Barak Obama as their current Shabez Goy, so as to bring this formerly Christian nation to its knees.  They fully intend to replace the United States Constitution with the United Nations Charter, which is a blatantly communistic document.  I refer to it as Corporate Communism.  It is the blueprint for their New World Order.  Please warn as many of your American friends as possible, for the hour is very late.  The Illuminati intend to use Barak Obama to completely impoverish America, so that a final ultimatum can be offered by the Illuminati: “Give up your Constitution or die!” – Pastor Eli James, www.anglo-saxonisrael.com.  Come quickly, Lord Jesus!]

 

 

 

 

The Issue of Slavery

The Issue of Slavery

By Southern Truth Seeker


Down here in Georgia, there has been much talk recently regarding a public apology from the State of Georgia to the blacks living here over the issue of slavery.   Before I express my own views on this, I believe it's more important to see what God has to say over this issue of slavery.  After all, He is the ultimate authority on all matters.

Much to the amazement of many modern-day "Christians" who tell us that God's law has been done away with, the Bible tells us there are actually legitimate forms of slavery.  The Bible tells us in Exodus 20:15 that "Thou shalt not steal" and the punishment for stealing is found in Exodus 22:1.  The first legitimate form of slavery is mentioned in Exodus 22:3, where someone who is found guilty of theft and is unable to make restitution for his/her theft is sold into slavery to repay the victim of the theft.  Compare this punishment to our modern-day system of putting the thief in jail/prison where in most cases, the victim never gets repaid and the taxpayers of society end up supporting the thief as he works out and learns to become a better thief. 

The second legitimate form of slavery is found in Deuteronomy 20:10-11.  In this case, slavery is permitted by God as the spoils of war. 

The third and final form of slavery is found in Leviticus 25:44-46.  In these verses we are told that slavery is permissible ONLY over those "strangers" that sojourn among us.  In other words, we are not to enslave our own people, namely the children of Israel.  Only those who are of another race and only if they "sojourn" among us.  In other words, what Yahveh appears to be saying is that if another race chooses to live with/among us, then we have the right to have them as a possession/slave.

Now let's take a look at each of these 3 forms of slavery and see if any of them were applicable to the black slaves who lived in America during the time of the Civil War.  Obviously, situations 1 & 2 weren't applicable to American blacks, since black slaves were neither making restitution for theft nor were they the spoils of any war that the United States had with Africa.  A case in favor of black slavery might could be made under the 3rd form of slavery, since blacks are "strangers" and we are allowed to have slaves of another race.  But the problem with this is that the black slaves did not choose to sojourn among us, but were instead sold to our people by their own African tribal chiefs.  In other words, they were already enslaved by their own people before being enslaved by white people.

I cannot agree that slavery, as it was practiced here in America, was right.  It did not meet any of the qualifications specified in the Bible.  But before we condemn our Southern ancestors for their mistakes, we also need to take a look at who else was involved in slavery.  The history books forget to tell us that General Grant of the Union Army owned slaves, so this obviously refutes the age-old myth that the Civil War was fought over slavery.  The history books also forget to tell us something else equally important.  In his book "Who Brought the Slaves to America", Walter White tells the answer to this equally important question.   I wonder how many Americans realize that it was the Jews who brought the black slaves here to America.  Yes, those same people who are always stirring up friction between blacks and whites over the issue of slavery through their organizations such as the ADL and Southern Poverty Law Center, were the ones who owned 95% of the ships that transported the blacks here to America be slaves.  The Jews were THE master slave traders.  Funny how we never hear this mentioned on "tee-vee".

One other myth I would like to mention regarding slavery is the common misconception that our Southern ancestors routinely beat on, underfed, and/or mistreated their slaves.  This is just plain silly and lacks any shred of common sense.  While I'm sure there were a small percentage of idiots who did mistreat their slaves, the vast majority did not.  How can I be sure of this?  If you're a farmer would you not take care of or maintain your John Deere tractor?  The same tractor you paid thousands of dollars for?  Of course you would, since you depend on this piece of equipment to be productive.  Your livelihood depends on it.  Slaves were the John Deere tractors of the 1800's.  Slave owners paid good money for them and depended heavily on them to produce.  A tired, beaten down, and/or malnourished slave could not have been nearly as productive as one who wasn't.   It would have been economic suicide for the slave owner to mistreat his slaves, especially after he paid a lot of money to obtain them.  So the myth that slaves were routinely mistreated flies in the face of common sense and logic.

No public apology needs to be made to blacks from the State of Georgia over the issue of slavery.  Almost every race has been enslaved at some point in history.  Were not our own people, the house of Israel, in bondage to the Egyptians before Moses led them out by God's hand?  Were not our people also enslaved to the Assyrians and then the Babylonians approximately 100 years later?  And are not all peoples of the earth in captivity today to the House of Rothschild, or Mystery Babylon the 8th beast, as is spoken of in Revelation 17:11-18?

What Is the Cause of the Economic Meltdown?

What Is the Cause of the Economic Meltdown?

By Pastor Eli James


Introduction: The Information Meltdown

I am always amused by mainstream media’s shallow coverage of nearly all important news events. More and more independent commentators are realizing that the corporate media rarely tells the truth about anything. Almost all "news," these days, is disinformation. There is a very important reason for this: the corporate media is part of the globalist business world, which means that any particular television network is either owned by another corporation, or contrariwise, the network is the parent company which owns other corporations. With so many corporations in bed with each other, few "news" outlets will report accurately on any serious problems concerning the corporate business world.

So it is with the banking industry, especially concerning international finance. Banking corporations are often conglomerates that have dealings in shipping, manufacturing, oil, armaments and entertainment. And those corporations that have interlocking boards of directors are keenly aware that controlling negative information about their conglomerate businesses is an important aspect of doing business. The days of the muckraking reporter are over, since much of the time the potential muckraker would be doing an expose about a subsidiary in the conglomerate.

Banking corporations that own oil corporations that own construction companies that own security companies that own chemical corporations that own media corporations are not going to allow any serious reporting about any aspect of the conglomerate. This is why we no longer have news reports coming from ABC, NBC, CBS, etc. Instead we have infotainment and infomercials. When necessary, we also get soft-peddled saber-rattling against potential enemies of the Corporate State. Serious, detailed commentary about any important subject is a thing of the past. The news media has become as vague as the politician: speaking words that say little or nothing. This is an art form. The old saying calls it "beating around the bush."

I have long been a critic of global corporations and their tendency to monopolize and control information. And since these corporations have so much power and influence with politicians, few politicians will say anything negative about their financial contributors, especially if they want free publicity. As the planet moves gradually towards becoming ONE BIG CORPORATION, it is understandable that the public relations subsidiary of the ONE BIG CORPORATION is only going to provide sketchy information about any serious economic problems.

Given these interrelated corporate interests, all news has become little more than corporate propaganda. All information coming from these sources has become inadequate. All establishment commentators, with very few exceptions, have become timid; and all reporters know that there are subjects which they cannot broach. In short, if you want the TRUTH about any given subject, your best source of information these days is the internet. The internet has loads of independent people, such as myself, and renegades who have left the corporate sector to blow the whistle on these activities. These independents and renegades are not beholden to any major corporation or the government. I can speak my mind without fear of being fired by the Personnel Division. The renegades may have old friends, who are still employed by the global corporation, that will become their enemies, but they are motivated to tell the truth for the benefit of those who desperately need this information. These alternative sources of information will often name names and reveal scandals that the corporate media cannot possibly touch. If there is something shady going on in the boardroom, the last thing the board members can handle is exposure. Thus, a tight control must be kept on all information, especially news of wrongdoing within the corporate establishment.


What is the Cause of the Current Economic Meltdown?

Given the fact that I am completely independent of this Beast System (the global corporate monolith), I can say things that no dependent journalist would dare to say. You will never hear a mainstream media "journalist" say this: The current world economic crisis is a direct result of – are you ready – FREE TRADE. Since FREE TRADE is the pet project of the global economy, its principles and operations cannot be questioned. The fact that, here in America, both the Democrats and Republicans have wholeheartedly supported all of these international trade agreements, neither party is going to question the wisdom of this policy. No politician will dare to question the soundness of Free Trade – not even Barak Obama.

I have gone on record as saying that Free Trade is a FREE RIDE for the multinational corporations. Critics of Free Trade have seen this day coming; and we have predicted that it will be an irreversible meltdown. Why? Because the international corporations, due to short-term greed and Free Trade, have killed the American economy.

With the blessing of the United Nations and other international business organizations, what Free Trade has done is to slowly and deliberately put America out of business. How has this happened?

First of all, there was the shutting down of America’s manufacturing sector. International corporations, by moving their manufacturing facilities to cheap labor markets, such as China, India and Mexico, eliminated millions of blue collar jobs in this sector of the economy. With manufacturing facilities being moved out of the country, middle management, supervisory and technical people had to move with the operation…until they could be replaced by newly trained locals.

After manufacturing moved out of the country, the high tech corporations decided to import computer programmers and technicians from other countries, such as India, to replace American techies who had been paid salaries at three or four times more money. Silicon Valley workers were especially hard hit by this gambit. Big corporations found that they could save money on customer service by employing telephone reps in foreign countries, thus putting more Americans out of work.

In addition to international corporations, small companies also felt the squeeze, because they simply could not compete against corporations that could produce millions of widgets for a fraction of the cost that a local company could. Such companies faced a disturbing choice: 1.) Either pack up and try to set up shop in another country, or 2.) Go out of business. The American shoe industry died off because of this factor. The steel industry disappeared. The tool and clothing industries began to feel the same pressure. Whole sectors of the economy simply collapsed under the weight of this process of wage deflation and job losses. America’s auto industry is next in line, including the numerous small businesses that feed the auto industry with parts and supplies. In order to compete in this global Free Trade market, a company must have access to cheap labor in order to survive. By 2005, nary a product with a "Made in America" tag could be found on any store shelf.

Initially, this trend toward cheap, outside labor may have had a marginal benefit to the American consumer, as goods produced overseas were slightly cheaper than goods produced by higher-paid American workers. But as more and more Americans were losing their jobs to cheap and slave labor, these cheaper goods were only available to those Americans who still had jobs or those who had money in the bank. As a result of this gradual, relentless exportation of jobs out of America, the international corporations began to see their customer base decline.

I am a proud, anti-internationalist "isolationist." I have never believed in the Free Trade concept. I saw, from the beginning, that the new international trade agreements, such as GATT and NAFTA, the World Trade Organization, the United Nations Industrial Development Organization, and United Nations Banking operations in the Third World had two particular goals in mind: 1.) To centralize control of trade within the United Nations Organization, thereby making the UN the place where the biggest and best deals could be made, and 2.) To maximize corporate profits by exploiting the world’s cheapest labor pools. But only the multinational corporations had access to such sweet deals. National and small businesses in America were out of the loop. There was no way that smaller companies could compete against this international monster.


Few people seem to realize what a huge role the United Nations Organization plays in promoting third world industrialization. UN loans to these technologically backward countries often go bad, because these countries simply do not have the resources to carry out such plans. In Africa, the petty dictators of these countries often use the UN loan money to lavish themselves with luxurious villas and personal possessions. Rarely – probably never - do such UN loans actually make the debtor country a better place to live.

It is a historical fact that America became the world’s richest nation, not by Free Trade, but by tariffs and protectionism. Until the 1960’s, our federal government did a reasonable job of protecting American industries and jobs from foreign competition. Protectionism works like this: Imported goods have a tariff imposed upon them which bring them to the approximate price level of similar American-made goods. Thus, the American consumer has always had a simple choice, to buy American or foreign goods at roughly the same price. It is also a fact that imported goods coming from socialist countries or from government subsidized industries in foreign countries make for unfair competition against American companies that have to risk their own money to stay in business. For these reasons, protectionism and isolationism have always benefited American industry and the American worker.

Free-Traders and internationalists derisively call this system "isolationist," but they will not tell you that this system has always been the best for the American worker. The real reason why the internationalists are opposed to tariffs is because tariffs have always been a barrier to exploiting cheap, foreign labor. So, you can see that such criticism, coming from the international corporations, is nothing but deception motivated by greed.


Corporate Totalitarianism

The payoff for the United Nations was and is greater economic control of all markets, as its banking operations, such as the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund, had, since 1947, been in the business of developing third world industry. It was only a matter of time before the UN’s third world industrial build-up would result in intense competition against America’s manufacturing industry. The irony of this factor is the fact that, of all countries, the American taxpayer has been paying the most money into the coffers of the UN, far more than any other nation. Congress has routinely appropriated "America’s share" for financing the UN, while the American people scarcely knew how much or how often. So, while the American people were financing the UN, the UN was laying the groundwork for America’s industrial defeat.

Mary Davison, in her expose of the UN’s totalitarian plans, Profound Revolution (1966), had this to say:

It might be suggested also, that the existing monetary systems of the civilized world will not begin to support the world-wide programs of the United Nations and that this is the real reason the International Currency is being prepared for launching. The World Government, which is the U. N., proposes to issue a WORLD CURRENCY and issue all currency through the World Bank which is a U. N. institution. Still the American people refuse to believe that the United Nations IS A WORLD GOVERNMENT.

And now we see that the UN’s third world industrialization projects have also put Americans out of work, because these projects redirect capital away from our home needs and also exploit cheap labor pools. Thus, the American taxpayer has been paying for the elimination of his own job, which would ultimately be exported to a UN project in a foreign country. It is not an exaggeration to say that the UN takes America’s generous subsidies with one hand and stabs us in the back with the other. This is the thanks we get for paying money into the UNO!

Mary Davison sums up the dilemma in this clear passage;

It might occur to somebody to ask just why the tax monies of the American Producer should be devoted to the building of oil and gas pipe-lines in these far-off countries. Informed people everywhere know that OIL is cartelist property; those who reap the profits from oil and gas are well able to pay for their own pipe-lines. This should raise the question: WHO WILL OWN THIS PROPERTY in which America has so much invested--THOUSANDS OF MILLIONS of dollars worth of wealth created through OUR TAX MONEY? When we deal with the subject of INDUSTRIALIZATION we are dealing with the profit motive. If we pay for all this—who should own it?

Indeed, US taxpayer money is being used by the UN to make international corporations rich(er).


Free Enterprise, the Goose That Lays the Golden Eggs, is the Exact Opposite of "Free Trade"

For much of the Twentieth Century, America was the world’s economic engine. We led the world in technology, innovation, efficiency, planning, design and construction…you name it. As America developed into this economic powerhouse, our labor force was the most highly skilled and best compensated work force the world had ever seen. America’s middle class was made up of these workers. The labor unions had extracted good pension plans and health insurance premiums from the corporations as well. This is the American System, known to all the world as "Free Enterprise." This is the economic system that is possible only under the United States Constitution, which is a nationalistic, protectionist document. Unfortunately, corporate lawyers have undermined the intent of the US Constitution, and we have entered the phase of Global Governance: government by lawyers, bankers and other thieves.

As the second and third worlds began to produce similar goods at less cost, American corporations consciously planned on eliminating these costs, as Third World corporations could produce the same products for far less in labor costs. Also, with advanced mechanization, the high-skill workers could be replaced with low-skill workers, thus reducing labor costs even more. The multinational corporations had to be able to get around America’s Constitutional protections against exploitation by international organizations. Enter "Free Trade."

The promoters of Free Trade unequivocally sold their system to the American public as a potential gold mine of economic opportunity for Americans. All the newspapers, all the bankers, all the politicians (Democratic and Republican) and all the economists told us what great thing "internationalism" is compared to "isolationism." Conservative critics couldn’t get a word of criticism into the mainstream press. Now we are seeing the fruit of their policies: destruction of the American economy.

Free Trade has led to a predictable circumstance: By eliminating America’s jobs, Free Trade was also eliminating the American consumer. Only a dimwit would fail to understand that a consumer has to have an income in order to be a consumer. The American consumer, now having lost his job and his income – thanks to Free Trade – cannot buy the cheaper goods that Free Trade produces. Free Trade is self-destructing as we speak!

The inevitable time has arrived when Americans are losing their jobs at such a fast pace that they can no longer afford the cheapest goods that China can make. The goods no longer move off the store shelves. More and more retail businesses are closing…and the recession – I mean Depression - is on. I am guaranteeing a world-wide depression unless Free Trade is abandoned and Free Enterprise (the American System) is reinstituted. "Free Trade" is killing the goose that lays the golden eggs.


The End Game

As I have explained many times to my radio show listeners, the only sector of the American economy that has been working at full capacity during the last decade was the housing market. Since new homes had to be built on American soil, there was no way that the corporations could export the jobs of the construction workers. The very nature of real estate is its location. The only way to keep construction costs down in this area is to import cheap labor; and that’s what the illegal aliens from Mexico provided. The Big Banks, having no loyalty to America or the US Constitution, encouraged illegal aliens to enter America by enticing them with low-interest loans. With the housing market declining, these "immigrants" would, hopefully, also become potential home-buyers. This would keep the housing market going.

In 2006, hurricanes Katrina and Rita also gave a boost to the construction industry, as the nation’s construction labor pool was kept working by rebuilding the southern coast.

But America’s housing construction boom was fast approaching its Waterloo: overbuilding. It was only a question of time when America would run out of buyers for existing real estate. The industry had a dilemma: Do we quit building and keep the price of housing steady? Or, do we keep building and hope that prices don’t fall? The second alternative was the only real choice. Since only the housing market was keeping Americans working, it would be suicide to stop building. If we have to go bust, let it be in the future and not immediately. But the day of reckoning has finally arrived. Overbuilding and a lack of buyers have caused the housing market to collapse, along with the banks and loan companies that were supplying the money to potential buyers. EVERYBODY SAW THIS COMING, but nobody could do anything about it, because housing was the only industry that was keeping people employed; and everybody was hoping against hope that some kind of fix could keep the industry working.

Not to be, however.

In March of this year (2008), Ben Bernanke, Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board, made his speech in Washington, stating,

"Far too much of the lending in recent years was neither responsible nor prudent. The terms of some subprime mortgages permitted homebuyers and investors to purchase properties beyond their means, often with little or no equity. In addition, abusive, unfair or deceptive lending practices led some borrowers into mortgages that they would not have chosen knowingly."

Hearing Bernanke blame mortgage companies for this crisis, I nearly threw a brick at my television set. I said to myself, "You duplicitous phony!" YOU’RE THE ONE WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS MESS! It is YOU AND YOUR PALS AT THE FEDERAL RESERVE AND THE WORLD BANK AND THE UN WHO HAVE CREATED THIS STILTED ECONOMY. IT IS YOU AND YOUR INTERNATIONALIST CORPORATIONS WHO HAVE BEEN PUTTING AMERICANS OUT OF WORK FOR THE LAST THIRTY YEARS. YOU LYING BANSKTER!!!!

To blame mortgage companies for trying to sell homes in this market is like criticizing the hot dog vendor for selling hot dogs after the baseball game is over. Although there were some newcomers who took advantage of the increased business provided by low interest rates, most of these companies were just trying to survive, just like the construction companies, service companies and skilled labor, who were all being employed by the housing industry. It’s like criticizing a drowning man for grasping at a life preserver.

Just as much blame goes to the Democratic Party, and liberal groups such as ACORN, which advocated lending to high-risk, low-income borrowers. Blaming local mortgage companies for this crisis is absurd. It is scapegoating, pure and simple. The Federal Reserve knew exactly what was happening and did not issue any warnings or new regulations to change these lending practices.

The fact is this: IF THE MORTGAGE COMPANIES HADN’T DONE WHAT THEY DID, THE MELTDOWN WOULD HAVE OCCURRED EVEN SOONER.

I COULD SEE RIGHT THROUGH Bernanke’s lies; and I smelled the putrid smell of his phony accusations and obvious shifting of blame. It was a convenient excuse for deflecting responsibility from himself and his internationalist corporate business partners. Perhaps a few people actually believed his statement! But few people seem to understand that the Federal Reserve System is in total control of our economy. The Fed determines how much money there is in circulation. They can boom the economy or bust it by how much money they create at any given time. ALL ECONOMISTS KNOW THIS.

I have spent thirty-five years in the home remodeling field, so I know what drives the housing industry, from the nuts and bolts to the big money. The major driving force of housing prices, since World War II, has been inflation. Real Estate, until now, has always been the best hedge against inflation. Real Estate tends to keep or improve its value, especially if the population increases. In Chicago, a house purchased in 1960 for $30,000 could be sold in 2000 for $500,000 – and that’s without making any improvements to the house!!! That’s quite a hedge against inflation. As long as the rest of the economy remains fairly stable, the value of real estate will always increase along with the inflation rate. All property investors know this. This is why they invest in real estate.

But, in the ought years (2000-2008) of this New Millennium, the Federal Reserve Board has been spending fiat money like Weimar Germany. Why? To finance the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. There are two ways to finance a war: by printing fiat money or by raising taxes. The last thing George Bush wanted to do was tell the American people, "We have to go to war against Iraq, and I’m going to have to raise your taxes to do so." This would have made the war even harder to sell. So Bush and his internationalist banker friends knew that they could pay Bechtel, Haliburton, Blackwater and all of these other insider corporations with fiat money. Inflation is an invisible tax, as the economists say.

All bankers know that financing a war with fiat money will create tremendous inflation. The Fed, the Neo-Kahns and George Bush, in a fit of overconfidence, assumed that Iraq would be an easy kill, so that the fiat money required would be negligible. They were wrong. Five years later, we are still embroiled in that fiasco and there appears to be no way out. In the meantime the Federal Reserve Note (US dollar) is being inflated into worthlessness, to the point where few nations or non-American corporations are willing to accept the Fed’s monetary issue. So, we are now experiencing a double whammy: the collapse of the housing market and high inflation due to financing the war with fiat money.


What’s the solution?

There is only one way to end this crisis: End the war and put Americans back to work IN AMERICA. I am not a university-trained economist, but I do know how to put America back to work. This is actually very easy: Put the construction industry back to work by rebuilding America’s collapsing infrastructure. This is how Hitler revived the German economy after the Weimar collapse. Hitler actually took his cue from Abraham Lincoln’s Greenbacks, which Lincoln circulated as NATIONAL MONEY, as opposed to banker’s money, which the North would have had to borrow at a rate of 28% interest!!!! This is what Roosevelt should have done more of during the Great Depression, but his banker friends in New York City wouldn’t put more money into circulation. Money was tight because credit was tight. Building a few dams hardly got the economy going again. It was the WWII industrial build-up that got America out of the Great Depression. With WWII on the horizon, the Federal Reserve opened the credit window again. No international banker can resist war profits. So money began to flow again.

If America can spend money blowing people to smithereens in Iraq, it can spend money at home paying workers to build bridges, pave highways, repair sewers, ENLARGE THE LEVEES IN NEW ORLEANS, etc. etc. etc. But, of course, this makes too much sense. No Free Trader is interested in doing this, because it would expose the failure of their internationalist policies.

In addition, it seems that the Zionists and internationalists are not as concerned about reviving America’s economy as the American people are. Their goal has been to gain total control of the Middle East oil supply, and so they are not even thinking in terms of putting America back to work. They have their priorities. We have ours. America, do you realize how you are being betrayed?

IF THE GOVERNMENT WERE IN CONTROL OF THE NATION’S MONEY SUPPLY, THIS SOLUTION WOULD EASY TO IMPLEMENT, JUST AS LINCOLN DID DURING THE CIVIL WAR. But our money supply is controlled by greedy, war-mongering internationalists, who own and control the Federal Reserve System, which is a parasitic entity, draining away the life-blood of the American people.

All I can do is suggest this solution; but the politics of world oil, control of international markets, and the Arab-Israeli conflict are currently more important to these internationalists than our collapsing economy. If these idiots in charge don’t get the message soon, the American people will soon be in the grip of a GREATER DEPRESSION, that will make 1929-1939 look like a church picnic.

The only solution to the world’s financial crisis is HONEST MONEY…but you won’t get that from this world’s criminal banking syndicate.

In His Name,

Pastor Eli James